DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen....
Transcript of DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen....
![Page 1: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
ED 361 977
AUTHORTITLE
INSTITUTION
SPONS AGENCYPUB DATECONTRACTNOTE
AVAILABLE FROM
PUB TYPE
EDRS PRICEDESCRIPTORS
DOCUMENT RESUME
EC 302 448
Fox, Timothy J.; Williams, WesImplementing Best Practices for All Students in TheirLocal School: Inclusion ofAll Students throughFamily and Community Involyement, Collaboration, andthe Use of School Planning Teams and IndividualStudent Planning Teams.Vermont Univ., Burlington. Center for DevelopmentalDisabilities.
Department of Education, Washington, DC.Oct 91H086J80005164p.; A product of the Vermont Statewide SystemsSupport Project.Vermont Statewide Systems Support Project, UniversityAffiliated Program, 499C Waterman Bldg., Universityof Vermont, Burlington, VT 05405 ($10 includingshipping and handling).Guides - Non-Classroom Use (055)
MF01/PC07 Plus Postage.Decision Making; *Disabilities; *EducationalPlanning; *Educational Practices; EducationalQuality; Elementary Secondary Education;Individualized Education Programs; *Mainstreaming;Meetings; Neighborhood Schools; School CommunityRelationship; Special Needs Students; *StatePrograms; State Standards; *Teamwork
IDENTIFIERS Collaborative Teaching; *Vermont
ABSTRACT
This manual presents guidelines to assist Vermontschools in the systems change involved in implementing full inclusionfor students with disabilities in general education classrooms andcommunity settings. The first chapter addresses general issuesconcerned with full inclusion, including Vermont's vision foreducation, the role of collaborative teaming, and students withintensive needs. The second chapter focuses on student, family, andcommunity involvement in planning, noting possible participants inboth the school planning team and the individual student planningteam. The third chapter looks at schoolwide planning for bestpractice improvement, with guidelines concerning: facilitatingproductive meetings of the planning team, tailoring the process tomeet the unique needs of each local school, gathering informationabout best practices, selecting and prioritizing best practices, andcoordinating plans of schools within a district. The IndividualStudent Team Planning Process is the subject of the fourth chapter,with guidelines addressing such issues as: initiation of the process,Student Planning Team members, and coordinating student needs withgeneral education class activities. The fifth chapter offersguidelines for collaborative teaming, including decision making,problem solving, and meetings. Appendices provide sample forms forboth the schoolwide planning process and the individual studentplanning process. (DB)
![Page 2: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
"Z)
IMPLEMENTING BEST PRACTICESFOR ALL STUDOITS IN THEIR
LOCAL SCHOOL
Inclusion of All Students Through Family andCommunity Involvement, Collaboration, and
the Use -of School Planning Teams andIndividual Student Planning Teams
October 1991
Tinwthy 5. FoXWes Williams
U.S. OCPARTMSNT OF EDUCATOONDeft. ol Educanomn Ressmen and ImprommentEDUCATIONAL RESOURCES INFORMATION
CVtns documCsernaTT IERn reproduced aswowed from Ma person Of orgamtation°rigmarole it
0 Muter changes Woo made TO .mprovemocoducteo auauty
POrnts of v*WI or ofxrueni Mated in In.: docu-mnt de a01 MICVIsfay represent °tiros!DEM position of ennucy
Vernwnt Statewide Systems Support Project 1Center for Developmental Disabilities
The University Affiliated Program of Vermont499C Waterman Building
University of VermontBurlington, Vermont 05405
(802) 656-4031
HEST COPY MIMI IR!2
![Page 3: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
AcknowledgmentsWe would like to acknowledge and applaud the numerous contributions of hundreds of
professionals, parents. students and other members of communities across Vermont who havedeveloped philosophies and practices to support full inclusion for all students in general educationclassrooms and community settings.
We would like to thank the more than 300 Vermont teachers, school administrators andparents who reviewed and provided feedback on the Best Practice Guidelines for Meeting theof All Students in Their Local Schools (1991).
We would specifically like to thank the administrators, staff, and parents of the followingschools for field testing the Schoolwide Planning Team Process and various aspects of the Indi-vidual Student Planning Team Process over the past two years:
Bakersfield Elementary School. Bakersfield. VermontWilliamstown Middle/High School. Williamstown, VermontLyndon Town Schools, Lyndonville, VermontUnion School. Montpelier, VermontBerlin Elementary School. Berlin, VermontWaterbury Elementary School, Waterbury. Vermont
We would also like to acknowledge the faculty and staff of the Center for DevelopmentalDisabilities and the Department of Education and Social Services at the University of Vermont andthe Vermont State Department of Education for their support in developing and field testing thecontent for this manual. We would like to especially thank the following individuals for theireditorial assistance: Wayne L. Fox, Lu Christie, Michael Giangreco, Susan Yuan, Anne Bakeman,Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen.
Authorship
Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint effort.
The development of this manual was supported by Vermont's Statewide Systems Support Project(Grant No.H086J80005 of the U.S. State Department of Education) However, the opinions ex-pressed herein do not necessarily reflect the position of the U.S. Department of Education and noofficial endorsement by them should be inferred.
3
![Page 4: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
Table Of Contents---
Chapter 1Meeting the Needs of All Students in General EducationSettings in Their Local Schools 1
Chapter 2 .
Student, Family and Communtty Involvement inSchool Planning 11
Chapter 3Schoolwide Planning for Best PracticeImprovement 15
Chapter 4The Individual Student Planning Team Process 30
Chapter 5Collaborative Teaming 53
FormsAppendix BAppendix A
Schoolwide Planning ProcessSchool Planning Team Management PlanSchool Planning Team Meeting WorksheetTeam Goals SheetTeam Member ChecklistTailoring the School Planning Team Process
Tasks to be CompletedBest Practice SurveyBest Practice Summary ChartBest Practice Selection WorksheetAction P'anSystems Change Summary SheetPolicy Change Summary SheetTraining Activities Summary Sheet
i
,aMNIIIN
Individual Student PlanningTeam ProcessTeam Management PlanTeam Meeting WorksheetTeam Goals SheetTeam Member ChecklistAdapting the Individual Student Planning
Team ProcessFundamental ValuesStudent Assessment WorksheetSkill Areas to be TaughtBest Practice Checklist for Individual StudentsActivity MatrixActivitY Selection WorksheetActivity/Class Summary FormActivity Compatibility PlanTask Planning SheetPriority Skill Areas - Program SummaryActivity/Class Management Plan
4
![Page 5: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
Questions Addressed in Each ChapterChapter 1Meeting the Needs of All Students in General Education Settings in TheirLocal Schools
What is the purpose of this book? 1
What is Vermont's vision for education? 1
What are the best practice guidelines? 2Are specific values incorporated into the best practice guidelines? 3Who are students with intensive needs? 3How can collaborative teaming facilitate the development of
shared ownership of goals, values and guidelines? 4Does one collaborative team do it all? 4Why should students, families and other community members
be involved as team members? 4What process can be used for building the supports needed to
improve the education of all students who attend the school? 5What process can be used for building,the supports needed to
serve individual students with intensive needs in general education classes9 5
Chapter 2Student, Family and Community Involvement in School Planning
Should families and other community members be on the school planning team? 11
Should students be members of the school planning team9 11Should the student's family be members of the student's individual planning team? 12Should students be members of their individual student planning team? 12Should the student's peers be members of the individual student planning team? 13Can students, school staff, families and other community members meet
together without creating conflicts or controversy among team members9 13How can families be supported to become informed about and involved in
schoolwide and individual student planning activities? 13
Chapter 3Schoolwide Planning for Best Practice Improvement
What is the School Planning Team Process? 15Who should be on the planning team and how can productive meetings be facilitated? 15How can the School Planning Team become familiar with best practices? 18How can the process be tailored to meet the unique needs of each local school? 18How can information about best practices be gathered from school administrators,
staff and students, parents and community members? 19How can survey responses be summarized9 20How can we address the needs of individual students in the planning process9 21How can the team select and prioritize best piactices for improvement? 22How do we develop plans for best practice improvement? 23How can we coordinate action plans with other school planning activities which
are ongoing within the school? 25How can the plans of several schools within the school district be coordinated? 26How do we continue to make progress from year to year? 28
ii 5
![Page 6: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
Chapter 4The Individual Student Team Planning Piocess
What is the Individual Student Planning Team Process? 30How can the Individual Student Planning Team Process be initiated? 31Does the student have to be assigned to general education classes? 31Who should be on the Student Planning Team? 31Which general class teachers should be team members? 32How can we encourage the student's family to participate in the planning process? 33What are family infornAtion and referral services? 33How can the family contact person facilitate the family's identification of values which
they want the team to give special consideration to in their child's program? 34How can the family contact person facilitate the family's selection of skills to be taught
to their child? 34How do we become an effective team? 34How can the planning process be adapted to meet the unique needs of the
student and school? 35How can the team identify fundamental values to address in the development
of the student's program9 37How can the team determine the student's strengths and educational needs? 38How can the team select skills to be taught to the student? 39How can the team incorporate best educational practices into the student's plan9 40What process can we use to determine which student needs can be met through
each general class activity? 40What are the "Other Activities" columns used for? 42How do we select activities to address fundamental values and priority skills? 42What is the Home/Family column used for? 44How do we fit in the Other Activities? 44What if the team decides that the student's assigned classes are not appropriate for
the student? 45What is the Activity Compatibility Plan9 45How can the matrix be translated into a student schedule9 48How can the team manage the accomplishment of tasks necessary to support the
student's program? 48How can the team summarize and monitor progress on priority skill areas that were
selected for instruction? 48How can the team summarize and monitor the implementation of the student's
program within specific classes and activities9 49How can the team insure that each team member knows their responsibilities for
each of the student's major instruction activities? 49When should the team complete Parts II and III of the Best Practice Indicator Checklist? 49When should the team begin the transition process to the next grade? 50How does the team develop the plan for the following year and still support the
student during the current year? 50
6Hi
![Page 7: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
Chapter 5Collaborative Teaming
What is a collaborative team? 52What are collaborative skills? 52How do team members build trust in each other? 52How do collaborative teams make decisions? 53How do collaborative teams solve problems? 53What is brainstorming? 54How do we deal with controversial issues? 54What are the steps in negotiating resolutions to conflicts9 55Is it important for team members to state team goals and individual goals? 55Do collaborative teams ever have fun? 56Who should be on a collaborative team? 57When and how often should School Planning Teams and
Individual Student Planning Teams meet? 57How large should teams be9 57Our Individual Student Planning Team has 12 members,
how can we be a collaborative team9 58How can we keep our Student Planning Team meetings under an hour
and still get anything accomplished? 59Our School Planning Team has 22 members, how can we be a collaborative team9 61How are we doing? 61
List of FiguresChapter 1Table 1 - Best Practice Guidelines for Meeting the Needs of All
Students in Their Local School 5 - 9
Chapter 3Figure 1 - The School Planning Process 16Figure 2 School Planning Team Management Plan 17Figure 3 School Planning Team Meeting Worksheet 17Figure 4 - Tailoring the School Planning Team Process 18Figure 5 - Best Practice Survey 19Figure 6 - Best Practice Survey Summary Chart 20Figure 7 - Best Practice Checklist for Individual Students 21Figure 8 - Best Practice Selection Worksheet 23Figure 9 - Sample Action Plan 24Figure 10 - Sample Systems Change Summary Sheet 25Figure 11 - Sample Policy Change Summary Sheet 26Figure 12 - Sample Training Activities Summary Sheet 26Figure 13 - Sample Coordinated Timeline 27Summary Chart - Forms far Completing Each-Task in the School
Planning Team Process 29
iv
![Page 8: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
Chapter 4Figure 1- Individual Student Planning Team Procas 30Figure 2 Team Management Plan 32Figure 3 - Team Meeting Worksheet . 35Figure 4 - Adapting the Student Planning Process 36Figure 5 - Fundamental Values 37Figure 6 - Student Assessment Worksheet 38Figure 7 - Skill Areas to be Taught 39Figure 8 - Best Practice Checklist for Individual Students 40Figure 9 - Activities Matrix 41Figure 10 Activity Selection Worksheet 43Figure 11 Class/Activity Summary Form 43Figure 12 - Activity Compatibility Plan 46Figure 13 - Support Task Planning Sheet 48Figure 14 - Priority Skill Areas - Program Summary 49Figure 15 - Activity/Class Management Plan 50Summary Chart - Forms for Completing the
Individual Student Planning Process 52
Chapter 5Figure 1 - Team Management Plan 59Figure 2 Team Member Observation Sheet 61Figure 3 - Team Meeting Worksheet 61Figure 4 - Team Member Checklist 63
![Page 9: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
CHAPTER1
Meeting the Needs of All Studentsin General Education Settings inTheir Local Schools
1?1
What is the purpose of this book?Vermont parents. educators, advocates and other community members have
made a commitment to the goals of improving education for all students and serv-ing all students, including those with intensive needs. in general education settingswithin their local schools. Accomplishing these goals requires systems change. InVermont. local school administrators, general and special educators, parents andother community members have been working collaboratively to develop schoolclimates, structures, curricula, and instructional supports which enable theirschools to improve education for all students and accommodate all students ingeneral classes. The purpose of this book is to share.some of the processes whichhave been developed to assist local schools with systems change. Key elements foraccomplishing necessary systems change are:
1. The development of shared goals and a vision of what education should be forall students.
2. Best practice guidelines which address specific educational practices andvalues to support the goals.
3. Collaborative teaming as a means to establish shared ownership of the goals,values and guidelines.
4. Student, family and community involvement in all aspects of school planning.
5. A process for building the supports needed to improve the education of allstudents who attend the school.
6. A process for building supports needed to serve individual students withintensive needs in general classes and community settings.
What is Vermont's vision for education?
Hundreds of Vermonters have contributed to the development of Vermont'sEducation Goals (Vermont Department of Education, 1990).
Goal 1: Vermonters will see to it that every child becomes a con-Netent, caring.productive, responsible individual and citizen who is committed to contin-ued learning throughout life.
Goal 2: Vermonters will restructure their schools to support very high performancefor all students.
Goal 3: Vermont will attract, support and develop the most effective teachers andschool leaders in the nation.
Goal 4: Vermont parents, educators, students and other citizens will create power-ful partnerships to support teaching and learning in every community.
![Page 10: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
Vermont's educational goals also articulate a vision of what "could be?
...Children move along at their own pace: what they need to learnand to grow drives the scnool. School failure once thought all butunavoidable for some. is extremely rare. The children know that inevery school at least one adult is watching out for them. Everyschool board member, parent, teacher and administrator acceptsthe responsibility of seeing to it that every child entering kinder-garten graduates from high school with an acceptable level ofachievement. There is no special education as we know it. Chil-dren are different from one another in lots of ways, and schoolsaccommodate everyone with an inventive array of services....Asystem is in place to aid students who are not progressing satisfac-torily. Those, who in the past would have failed, are intercepted atage three or earlier to address learning difficulties Parents arepartners. Teachers communicate frequently and directly withthem....The business community works closely with schools,providing support and opportunities for work-study. employmentand retraining....School is not a place, but a set of relationshipsamong individuals, some are teaching and some are learning.Summer operations include remedial, tutorial, and enrichmentcourses and activities, especially for younger students. The schoolday is flexible to accommodate working students....Much of theleadership for the educational programs comes from teachers.They work together in teams. The teachers and administrators areconstantly changing parts of the school, amplifying things thatwork, dropping things that do not... (Vermont Department ofEducation, 1990. p. 1-7).
In addition to developing a set of goals for education and a vision of what ourschools could be in the future, the Vermont legislature has enacted Act 230(1990)which emphasizes success for all students in general classes and paves the way forschools to capture the vision.
It is the policy of the state that each school district design andimplement, in consultation with parents, a comprehensivesystem of educational services that will result, to the maximumextent possible, in all students succeeding in the regular class-room.... At the building level, services should avoid the inappro-priate use of special education resources... A range of effectiveeducational services supported with local, state and federalfunds should be available to all students who are failing or atrisk of failing academically (Act 230, 1990, pp. 1).
Every school in Vermont is required to have an instructional support team andinstructional support services which are available to all children who require addi-tional classroom assistance.
laWhat are the best practice guidelines?
The Best Practice Guidelines for Meeting the Needs of All Students in TheirLocal Schools (19911 is a document which lists 54 specific statements of educa-tional practice which support the education of all students in their local schools.The best practice statements afe general strategies and methods for developing anddelivering educational services which optimize the preparation of all students tobecome competent, caring, productive, and responsible individuals. The guidelinesare intended to be used as standards for assessing schoolwide and individualstudent programs and services. They are based upon the Best Practice Guidelinesfor Students with Intensive Educational Needs (1987), effective schools literature.
2AO
![Page 11: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
and the experiences and input of hundreds of Vermonters who are restructuringtheir local schools to improve education and accommodate all children. Areascovered by the guidelines include:
school climate and structure,collaborative planning,social responsibility.curriculum planning.delivery of instructional support services.individualized instruction.transition planning.family-school collaboration, andplanning for continued best practice improvement.
The guidelines may be found in Table 1 at the end of this chapter. Chapter 3describes how to use the guidelines to improve services to all students. Chapter 4describes how to use the guidelines to develop individual student programs andsupports which enable schools to serve all students in general education settings.
Are specific values incorporated into the best practiceguidelines?
Yes. Best practices are as much value statements as they are statements ofeducational practice. The development of any set of standards requires thearticulation of values which act as the foundation and framework for developingthe standards. The values which are incorporated into the Best Practice Guidelinesinclude the following:
1. All students are assigned to age-appropriate general education classes in theirlocal school.
2. All students are afforded equal opportunities to participate in all school spon-sored age-appropriate activities (e.g.. academics. sports. field trips. job training.clubs, dances).
3. Specialized services are incorporated into general education and communityactivities.
4. Educational experiences are individualized for every student.
5. There is shared ownership, decision-making and collaboration among schooladministrators, staff, students, families, school board members and othermembers of the community for improving educational services for all students.
6. The family's values and needs are addressed when planning for and deliveringeach student's educational program.
7. The curriculum promotes meaningful participation in community life and sets ahigh standard of excellence through content (e.g., math, social skills, history)and process (e.g.. problem solving, collaboration, study skills) oriented goals.
Who are students with intensive needs?
Formal definitions of intensive need have little functional use or meaning at thelocal school level. "What is considered a 'severe disability' varies from one tzchool to
3 i
![Page 12: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
the next and is contingent upon each school community's beliefs and experiencewith students whose educational needs go beyond the school's standard curriculumor instructional practices- (Thousand and Villa. 1990, pp. 2-3). As used herein.students with intensive needs includes all students identified by their teachersand parents as presenting significant educational challenges to the school. Thiscan include students with severe learning impairments. students with behavioralchallenges, students with significant medical needs, or students whose gifts andtalents present educational challenges. A student need not be eligible for a specificsupport service (e.g., special education. Chapter 1) to be considered by teachers orparents as having intensive needs and requiring individualized support services.
How can collaborative teaming facilitate the development ofshared ownership of the goals, values and guidelines?
Shared ownership is developed by including all stakeholders (e.g., students.parents, community members, school staff) at the beginning of the systems changeprocess and by providing them with ways to have meaningful input into the deci-sion-making process. Collaborative teaming, as described in Chapter 5, providesdiverse groups of people with a set of procedures and guidelines by which they canwork together as equal partners to address issues and to solve problems. Threeprimary characteristics which define a collaborative team are: a) shared beliefs andcommon goals. b) decision making by consensus, and c) diverse membership.Other major characteristics which a team must demonstrate to be consideredcollaborative are: shared tasks, responsibilities and leadership; encouragement ofeach other to interact and to take part in problem solving and decision making; andrule setting for dealing with sensitive or controversial issues.
Does one collaborative team do it all?
Two types of collaborative teams are used to accomplish the goals of improvingeducation for all students and accommodating for the needs of all students ingeneral classes: the School Planning Team and Individual Student Planning Team_The purpose of the School Planning Team is to improve education for all studentswho attend the school. To accomplish this goal, the team should include personsv. ho are representative of the school and community (e.g., school administrators,teachers, other school staff, students, families, school board members, other inter-ested community members). Individual Student Planning Teams are formed toprovide support to students with intensive needs, their teachers and families. Teammembership should consist of the student, people most involved with the studenton a day-to-day basis (e.g., parents, teachers, peers, principal), and other personsdepending on the particular needs of the student or family (e.g., physical therapist,guidance counselor, employment specialist).
Why should students, families and other community membersbe involved as team members?
Students, their families and other community members should be members ofthe School Planning Team because they can be the most effective advocates forimproving education. Students and their families are theconsumers of educational services, and as such thry have an investment in theschool. Other community members also have an investment in the school. Theyare the property owners, taxpayers, employers, and community advocates. Involv-ing students, families and other community members as full team members fromthe beginning of the process can facilitate the sharing of their goals and empowerthem as advocates for the school. In addition, people have a right to be involved in
4
![Page 13: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
19.
decisions that will have an impact upon their lives or the lives of their children.There should be systematic opportunities for them to be involved in the decision-making process.
Family involvement as full team members in the Individual Student PlanningTeam Process is especially crucial since the team will be making choices aboutmany aspects of their child's lffe inchiding living, working and playing in the com-munity. The decisions made will have a very real impact not only on the child'slife, but on the life of the family. Each goal selected for a student may take awaytime and resources from other, perhaps equally or more important. goals. Sinceeach decision has a cost, it is very important that the student's and family's valuesare represented in the decision-making process. Considering the values of thestudent and family is not only important to making good decisions, but also towhether goal attaimnent and skill acquisition have effects outside of the school'sprogram. Chapter 2 provides more detailed information on how to involve stu-dents and families.
What process can be used for building the supports needed toimprove the education of all students who attend the school?
The School Planning Team Prc-:ess (described in Chapter 3) has been used forplanning schoolwide systems changes to improve education for all students. Theschool planning process provides schools with a means to: a) determine the extentto which administrators, educators and related services staff, parents, and commu-nity members value each best practice: b) determine which best practices are inneed of improvement: c) target best practices for improvement: and d) developaction plans which address: changing school policy: changing service deliveryoptions: and providing training for school staff, students, parents and other com-munity members to achieve targeted best practice improvements.
What process can be used for building the supports needed toserve individual students with intensive needs in generaleducation classes?
The Individual Student Planning Team Process (described in Chapter 4) is usedto develop best practice-based programs for students with intensive needs whichmaximize participation in general class and other school and community activities.The student planning process includes a series of tasks to be accomplished by theIndividual Student Planning Team. Various checklists, forms and surveys havebeen developed to assist the planning team to complete the tasks. Major tasksinclude: a) establishing the team, b) facilitating family participation. c) tailoring theprocess to meet the student's and the school's needs, d) identifying the student'sstrengths and needs, e) using a matrix to determine general class activities whichcan be adapted to meet the student's needs, f) monitoring progiess. and g) planningtransitions.
![Page 14: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
Table 1
Best Practice Guidelines for Meeting the Needs ofAll Students in Local Schools
SCHOOL CLIMATE AND STRUCTURE
1. The school's philosophy statement and objectives are developed by administrators, staff,students, parents, school board members and other community members and reflect theschool's commitment to meeting the individual needs of all students in age-appropriate generaleducation and community settings.
2. The school's climate is established by administrators, staff, students, parents, school boardmembers and other community members and promotes respect for individual differences amongstudents, encourages the development of positive self-esteem, establishes high achievementexpectations for all students, and encourages the development of caring personal relationshipsamong students and staff.
3. The school's code of conduct for students and staff is established by administrators, staff,students, parents, school board members and other community members, emphasizes positivebehavior, is applied in a consistent, fair manner, and takes into account the unique needs ofindividual students.
4. The school provides ample opportunities for students, staff, administrators, parents. schoolboard members and other community members to be recognized for their accomplishments.including helping others.
5. The general roles and responsibilities of all school staff (including contracted staff such asan occupational therapist or psychologist) relative to providing instruction and support to allstudents are clearly delineated by administrators, staff, students, parents, school board mem-bers and other community members.
6. The school's professional development process is developed by administrators, staff, stu-dents. parents, school board members and other community members and includes inservicetraining, regularly scheduled observations with feedback, technical assistance, peer coaching,and mentoring.
7. The school's instructional support system (e.g., classroom-based model for delivering sup-port services, teacher assistance team, individual student planning teams, special educationpre-referral process, volunteer system) is developed by administrators, staff, students, parents,school board members and other community members and is available to all students and staff.
COLLABORATIVE PLANNING
8. The school provides opportunities for staff, students, family members, and communitymembers to become proficient at functioning in a collaborative manner (i.e.. share responsibilityand resources, make decisions by consensus, use a structured meeting agenda format, rotateteam roles of facilitator, timekeeper and recorder).
9. The school provides time during school hours for instructional support teams (e.g., indi-vidual student planning teams, teacher assistance teams, teaching teams) to meet and forindividual team members to monitor services, and to provide timely consultation, support andtechnical assistance to families and staff.
614
![Page 15: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
10. For students with intensive needs in basic skill and/or social skill areas or who are chal-lenged by their gifts and talents, individual student planning teams are convened which areresponsible for the development and implementationa all aspects of the student's educationalprogram (e.g.. student goals. student schedules, procedures to address learning/behavior/management issues, transition plans, strategies to support the student and his/her teachersand family).
11. Individual student planning teams consist of the student, family members, the student'sgeneral class teacher(s) and other appropriate persons based upon the student's needs (e.g.,principal, Chapter I teacher, music teacher, physical therapist. one or two of the student'speers, teaching assistant, special educator, social worker, representatives of community agen-cies, family advocates).
12. The individual roles of each student planning team member, including related serviceproviders and other consultants, are specified by the team and are supportive of the educa-tional needs of the student.
SOCLAL RESPONSIBILITY
13. The school facilitates the development of social responsibility and self-reliance by promotingstudent participation in volunteer organizations and activities (e.g., community service activi-ties, peer tutoring/mentoring activities, student government, participation in decision makingabout important school or community issues).
14. The school's curriculum provides structured opportunities for students to learn about andappreciate individual differences among people.
15. The school's curriculum provides structured opportunities for students to develop appropri-ate social skills (e.g., making friends, cooperating with others, sharing, listening, avoidingfighting) which include frequent practice during school, home and community activities.
16. The school provides opportunities for all students to participate in age-appropriate schoolsponsored extra-curricular activities (e.g., field trips, sports teams, clubs, dances, assemblies,student government).
17. For students with intensive needs in the eocial skill area, an individual program for increas-ing social skills is developed which includes: a) assessment of current skills in identified home,school and community settings; b) identification of adaptations and support needed to functionin those settings; c) procedures for working with school staff and familles,to incorporate socialskill training and/or practice into school and ntmily routines.
CURRICULUM PLANNING
18. The school's curricula are developed by teachers/staff, students, parents, administrators,and community members and identify age-appropriate content (e.g., language arts, math.history, social/emotional, arts, health) and process oriented (problem solving and collaborationskills, study skills) goals and objectives which promote meaningful participation in age-appro-priate activities in home, recreational, educational, work and other aspects of community life.set a high standard of excellence and address the needs of all students.
19. A variety of age-appropriate non-school instructional settings (e.g.. daycare settings, thestudent's home, local stores, and job sites) are available to students and matched to individualneeds for learning new skills or for generalizing skills to new settings.
157
![Page 16: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
20. The process for identifying curriculum content for an individual student with intensiveneeds in basic skill and/or social areas includes an analysis of the student's skills and inter-ests and of the age-appropriate activities, skills and adaptations needed for the student tofunction in specific home, school, work, recreation and other community settings.
21. Objectives for students with intensive needs in basic skill and/or social areas specifycriteria which include performance in the student's home, school and other age-appropriatecommunity settings.
22. Students with intensive needs in basic skill and/or social areas have paid work experi-ences in integrated community settings prior to leaving school.
23. The system for monitoring the progress of students with intensive needs in basic skill and/or social areas includes: a) indications of level of independence on identified skills/activities,b) indications of environments in which those skills/activities have been demonstrated, c) anannual summary, and d) post school follow ups for purposes of program improvement.
DELIVERY OF INSTRUCTIONAL SUPPORT SERVICES
24. Instructional support services and staff (e.g.. Chapter I, special education, speech andlanguage, guidance, peer tutoring) are incorporated into ongoing school and community activi-ties.
25. The decision to pull any student out of ongoing school or community activities to receivesupport services is a team decision based upon documentation that the student's needs couldnot be achieved through the use of supplementary aids and services in the classroom. Thisdecision is not based upon staff preferences.
26. For students with needs (e.g., counseling, community-based training, medical) whichcannot be met through ongoing activities, pull out is scheduled during activities which theteam determines to be lowest priority for the student.
27. The delivery of instructional support services (e.g., consultation, training, technical assis-tance, cooperative planning with support staff, team teaching with support staff, support staffdelivering direct services in the classroom, release time for planning, access to instructionalsupport teams) includes support to teachers, teaching assistants, volunteers, and other directinstructional staff.
INDIVIDUALIZED INSTRUCTION
28. The school provides all students with opportunities to set personal goals and to plan. withparents and teachers, how their goals will be addressed during the school year.
29. The school provides opportunities for all staff to become proficient at previewing instruc-tional activities, giving clear written and verbal directions, checking for student understandingand giving students constructive feedback and positive reinforcement.
30. The school provides opportunities for all staff to become proficient in using a variety ofinstructional methods (e.g., cooperative learning, whole language, peer tutoring, drill andpractice, incidental teaching, computer-assisted instruction), matching methods to individualstudent needs, and incorporating methods into ongoing activities.
816
![Page 17: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
31. A variety of instructional groupings (e.g., small group, large group. multi-aged groups.cooperative group, individual instruction) is available to all students and matched to individualstudent needs.
32. A variety of instructors (e.g., teachers, teacher assistants, same-age peer tutors, cross-agepeer tutors, peer mentors, volunteers) are available to students and matched to individualstudent needs.
33. The school provides opportunities for all staff to become proficient at using a variety ofinstructional materials (e.g.. real items, photographs, drawings, work sheets, textbooks. audio/visuals), at matching materials to individual student needs, and incorporating mqterials intoongoing activities.
34. The school provides opportunities for all staff to become proficient at teaching severaldifferent goals from the same curriculum area through a single group activity (e.g.. during agroup math activity some students may be learning addition while others are learning count-ing or one-to-one correspondence).
35. The school provides opportunities for all staff to become proficient at teaching goals fromdifferent curriculum areas through the same group activity (e.g.. during a group social studiesactivity some students may have a primary goal of learning the social studies content whileothers have primary goals of learning language, communication, or social skills).
36. The school provides opportunities for all staff and students to become proficient at identi-fying a variety of ways students can acquire or demonstrate skills/knowledge (e.g., signing,writing, typing, gesturing, oral tests or reports, art displays, taped presentations), matchingthem to individual student needs, and incorporating them into ongoing activities.
37. For each lesson currently being taught, there is a written instructional program or lessonplan which is available to all direct instructional staff.
38. Student progress is monitored and analyzed on a regularly scheduled basis.
39. Decisions to modify instructional groupings. methods or materials are based upon mea-sures of student progress.
40 A current schedule of daily student activities which describes what is being done, when,and with whom, is available and readily accessible.
TRANSITION PLANNING
41. There are procedures for facilitating the smooth transition of all students from one educa-tional setting to another, and from school to post-school life.
42. A written plan for transitioning each student with intensive needs, including students whoare gifted, from one educational setting to another is developed and implemented in advance ofthe move (e.g.. 6 to 9 months).
43. For high school aged students with intensive needs, written graduation plan for transi-tion to post-school life (e.g., employment, education, recreation, residential) is developed andimplemented well in advance of the transition (e.g.. at age fourteen) and reviewed annually.
FAMILY-SCHOOL COLLABORATION
44. The school provides families with the freedom to visa the school and to communicateregularly with school staff on topics important to both the family and the scnool.
9
1 7
![Page 18: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
r45. There is information available to families which assists them to access informal support net-works and connect with community resources (e.g.. daycare programs, recreation programs,counseling, respite care, vocational rehabilitation, mental health).
1
46. The school provides families with opportunities for consultation, training and follow up fromschool staff to maximize their children's development in home arm other community settings.
47. Families are included in advisory, decision-making. and advocacy activities of the school (e.g..advisory committees, curriculum committees, development of the school philosophy and climate.school planning teams, staff development committees).
48. Families are included in the decision-making process to determine the high priority educa-tional needs of their children, and how and where (school, home, or community settings) theirchildren will be taught.
49. Instructional planning includes procedures for assisting families to incorporate instructionand/or practice of skills into ongoing home and community activities.
PLANNING FOR CONTINUED BEST PRACTICE IMPROVEMENT
50. A plan for improving best practice-based services within the school is developed every three tofive years by a school planning team consisting of administrators, staff, students, parents, schoolboard members and other community members.
51. The school's plan includes: a) a review of the school's goals and the extent to which goals andbest educational practices are achieved: b) an examination of services offered by the school andhow they relate to student, family. and community needs: c) follow up measures of students'performance in the next school setting or post school settings: and d) activities and timelines forimproving best practices.
52. The school planning team meets periodically to monitor progress on implementing the school'splan and to make necessary adjustments in activities and timelines for achieving the plan.
53. The school's plan and subsequent reports of progress in implementing the plan are dissemi-nated to parents. school district staff and community members.
54. There is a periodic evaluation of the planning process by school staff, students, parents,community members and persons from outside of the school (e.g.. staff from other schools, collegesand universities, state and local government).
References
Act 230. An act relating to reforms in special education. (1990). 16 V.S.A. part 5, Chapter 99.
Statewide Project. (1987). The best Practice guidelines for students with intensive educationalneeds. Center for Developmental Disabilities. University of Vermont.
Thousand. J. & Villa, R. (1990). Strategies for educating learners with severe handicaps withintheir local home schools and communities. Focus on Exceptional Children. Volume 23, Number3.
Williams, W., Fox, T., Thousand, J., & Fox, W. (1990). Level of acceptance of best practices in theeducation of students with severe handicaps. in Vermont. Education and Training in Mentalatarslatign. June, pp. 120-131.
Vermont Department of Education. (1990). Vermont's educational zoals. Public Affairs Office.Montpelier, VT. 10
18
![Page 19: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
CHAPTERli
Student, Family and CommunityInvolvement in School Planning 12
19'
1?1
Should families and other community members be on the SchoolPlanning Team?
There are three basic reasons for involving families of school children and othercommunity members on planning teams to improve best practices for all students inlocal schools: a) they have a right to be involved: b) they can be the school's bestadvocates: and cl they have knowledge. experience, perspectives and other re-sources which can greatly benefit the planning process.
In a democratic society, it is an assumed guarantee that people have a right tobe involved in decisions that will have an impact on their lives and on the lives oftheir children. Schools typically encourage community involvement and providesystematic opportunities for families and other community members to be involved.Serving on school boards, attending school board meetings. participating on plan-ning teams and voting on school budgets are but a few of the avenues schoolsprovide for community involvement.
The provision of quality education which meets the needs of all students re-quires community support. Families of school children and other communitymembers are the most effective advocates for improving education. Involving themas full team members on the School Planning Team from the beginning of the pro-cess can facilitate their sharing the goals and harness their power as advocates.
Involvement of families and other community members provides a vehicle forschools to access a rich array of community resources which can be used to supportquality education. For example, community members can: provide the school withadvice and information in their areas of expertise; work as volunteers in the schoolto supplement instructional resources; run special interest clubs (e.g.. French.quilting, computers): volunteer their businesses as vocational and community-basedtraining sites; and make needed donations to the school (e.g., computers, software.supplies, books, printing services, and time, labor and materials to plan and build aplayground).
Families and other community members look at issues from different perspec-tives and these perspectives can enrich the planning process. For example, educa-tors may tend to plan for a six hour school day and be primarily concerned abouthow decisions will impact on students' academic performance and staff time. Fami-lies may have more concern for how decisions impact upon children's whole lives(e.g., what they do before and after school) and their families. Other communitymembers may have concerns about students being prepared for the world of workand being responsible citizens. Addressing different perspectives can produceplanning that is more comprehensive and beneficial to everyone.
Should students be members of the School Planning Team?
Yes! Ultimately the decisions made by the School Planning Team will directlyimpact the students and require their cooperation in changing how things operate.Students sharing the goals of the tcarn and developing ownership of changes willempower them to assist in making changes. In addition, students have first handknowledge of what needs to be improved and ideas for how things can be improved.Empowering students through involving them as team members accesses an often
![Page 20: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
overlooked school resource and provides the students with a good experience inresponsibility, decision making. problem solving, collaborative teaming and citizen-ship.
la Should the student's family be members of the student'sIndividual Plannivag Team?
Families include students' parents. brothers, sisters, grandparents, aunts,uncles and other persons who are extremely important to the child. Family involve-ment as full team members in th.t Individual Student Planning Team Process isespecially crucial since the team will be making decisions about many aspects ofthe child's life. Specific family members who will plan with the team should beselected by the student, her parents and other team members. Each goal selectedfor a student can significantly reduce the amount of time and resources that can bedevoted to other, perhaps equally or more important goals. Since each decisionrepresents a cost, it is very important that the family's values are represented in thedecision-making process.
Family involvement is also needed because families are the most committedlong-term advocates for the child. Teachers and other service providers come andgo. Only families know the full history of the child and have a total picture of whatis going on in the child's life. The family has the most detailed knowledge of thestudent's strengths and needs, and the skills the student needs to function outsideof school settings. Family values and preferences should be a major factor whenthe team develops the student's program. When planning for the student, thefamily can be the school's greatest resource.
The decisions made by th2 planning team not only have a very real impact onthe child's life, but on the life of the family. Failing to consider the impact on familylife may lead to problems between the family and the school. For example, somemembers of the team may strongly believe that aspects of the student's programshould be carried out by the parents at home. However, the parents may not seethemselves taking on a teaching role. Perhaps they do not agree that those aspectsof their child's program are crucial. Raising this son or daughter is only one of alarge group of family functions and responsibilities and perhaps the progress orneeds of the student may not be the most important issue for the family at a giventime. The team needs to recognize and acknowledge family priorities and assist thefamily to address them through the planning process.
vi Should students be members of their Individual StudentMa Planning Team?
Yes! The decisions made by the Individual Student Planning Team will directlyimpact on students and require their cooperation. For example, if the team isdeciding on a program to help the student control anger during frustrating situa-tions, who is better suited to help decide the specifics of the program? If the stu-dent has been provided decision-making opportunities and feels ownership for theprogram, the likelihood for success is much higher. In addition, the student willgain first hand knowledge of the issues that the team is addressing and the amountof effort being expended to assist the student to reach his goals. Empowering thestudent through involvement as an equal member of the planning team can help toimprove the student's self concept and ability to develop and attain individual goals.The student is also provided with real experiences in responsibility, decision mak-ing, problem solving, collaborative teaming and citizenship.
When dealing with very young children or when some team members are veryuncomfortable with the idea of the student attending team meetings, the teamshould .aake a decision about how and when the student will he involved on the
12
S.
![Page 21: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
1?1
team. The team might only invite the student to be a member of the team for deal-ing with specific issues. For example. the team might discuss issues during the firstpart of the meeting and invite the student to attend the final portion of a meeting tobe informed about the team's discussions and to take part in some decisions. Asthe student gains confidence with the team and as team members become comfort-able discussing issues with the student present. the amount of time and the num-ber of decisions in which the student is involved should increase.
Should the student's peers be members of the Individual StudentPlanning Team?
In many cases, involving one or moi-e of the student's peers as members of thestudent's Individual Student Planning Team is essential to developing the mostappropriate program for the student. When the team is considering involving peerson the team, the student, if possible. should be involved in making that decision. Insome cases, the student may wish to have a friend accompany her to planning teammeetings for emotional support. In cases where students cannot represent them-selves on the team, a peer might be very impon.ant to keep the team focused onactivities, materials, and social norms of the student's peer group. Classmates canalso be very helpful when considering class,.-)m accommodations for a particularstudent. Students often have wonderful ideas about how to include a student withintensive needs in classroom activities. Students who are members of individualplanning teams for another student are also provided with opportunities to developempathy, responsibility, decision making, problem solving, collaborative teaming,citizenship, and communication skills.
Can students, school staff, families and other communitymembers meet together without creating conflicts orcontroversy among team members?
They can't! Any time people with diverse backgrounds and needs come togetherto address a particular issue there will be conflict and controversy. Collaborativeteams are particularly geared to deal with conflict. In fact, conflict is often neces-sary in order for a collaborative team to develop the best possible solutions toproblems. There are no winners or losers on a collaborative team. Decisions aremade by consensus. Everyone must agree in order for the team to continue towork. This cooperative philosophy requires that teams come up with creative,productive and successful solutions to problems. When conflict initially arises inthe team, meetings can become very uncomfortable and relationships strained. Ifcontroversy is not handled openly and honestly, relationships can be injured to thepoint where people stoP coming to meetings. In order to benefit from diversity andconflict, collaborative teams must set ground rules for dealing with conflict andteam members should follow steps for resolving conflicts as the need arises. Referto Chapter 5: Collaborative Teaming, for more information on dealing with contro-versy.
How can families be supported to become informed about andinvolved in schoolwide and individual student planningactivities?
Typically families are extremely busy. In many families there are single parentsor both parents need to work. Families are interested in their children's education,but they often need support to become involved. Some ways schools can supportfamily involvement are listed on the following page.
13
21
![Page 22: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
Families and other community members need to feel welcomed and valued bythe school staff. Not many people will continue to go to a place where they feel theyare not valued. Parents and other community members need to feel that they are apart of the decision-making process in order to continue to be involved.
Meetings need to be scheduled at times when families and other communitymembers can attend. Many families or other community members cannot attendmeetings dunng school hours. To involve the community in schoolwide planning.the meetings may need to be in the evening. Schools can support parents to beinvolved on Individual Student Planning Teams by assisting them to get time offwork to attend meetings during school hours. Teams can also meet at the parent'swork place or in the parent's home, if convenient.
Provide childcare during meeting times. Some families cannot attend meetingsbecause of a lack of adequate childcare. The school cm secure childcare for thoseparents who cannot find adequate childcare on their own. Some teams encourageparents to bring small children with them to team meetings. These types of accom-modations can go a long way to make families feel that their participation is appre-ciated and valued by the school.
Families and other community members, as well as teachers, students andadministrators, need to learn calaborative teaming skills (refer to Chapter 5) tomake meetings efficient and productive so that people feel attending meetings isworthwhile. Meetings need to start and end on time!
Families, students, other community members, school administrators andstaff need to build trust. Building of trust (refer to Chapter 5) takes time andenergy. It is extremely difficult for groups of people to express ideas and feelings toeach other until everyone knows that their input will be valued, that they will betreated with respect. that they will be accepted for who they are, that promises willbe kept, and that confidentiality will be maintained.
Families, students and other community members need more ways to beinvolved than just by attending meetkngs. Newsletters or articles in the newspa-per to keep the community informed about school activities and proposed changesin the school are extremely important. Questionnaires or telephone surveys askingfor community feedback and ideas can solicit the involvement of parents and othercommunity members who cannot attend meetings. Community meetings duringwhich cmimunity members and school staff members meet in small groups todiscuss specific issues or concerns can be very effective in giving community mem-bers opportunities to become involved. Phone calls or notebooks sent home on aregular basis are important for families involved on Individual Student PlanningTeams. A team member can be identified as the major family contact person tovisit with families who cannot attend meetings to keep them updated on meetingagendas and solicit their input into team decision making
Schools can assist families to have more time and energy to devote toIndividual Student Planning Teams. Families who are going through short orlong term periods of stress due to loss of jobs, death in the family, loss of childcare,divorce, or the arrival of a new baby may not be able to devote much time or energyto planning for their children's education. In these cases the school can makeavailable information and support to assist families to access informal supportnetworks and connect with community services (e.g.. daycare programs. respite _care, recreation programs, counseling). In severe cases, the school can assist thefamily to access more intensive family support services from local mental healthagencies.
14
![Page 23: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
CHAPTER3
Schoolwide Planning for Best I
Practice Improvement
What is the School Planning Team Process?
The School Plaruting Team Process is intended to assist local schools, familiesand other members of the community to use the best practice statements to review.develop and implement plans to improve schoolwide programs and services for allstudents. The planning process provides schools with a means to:
1. Determine the extent to which administrators, educators and relatedservices staff, parents, and other community members value each bestpractice statement;
2. Determine which best practice statements are in need of improvement;
3. Target best practice statements for improvement; and
4. Develop action plans which address changing school policy, changingservice delivery options, and providing training for school staff, students,parents and other community members to achieve targeted best practiceimprovements.
The school planning process is intended to be a continuing improvement activitywithin the school. The process is not simply a means of evaluating program efforts.but a vehicle for making needed improvements in services as identified by adminis-trators. teachers, students. parents. school board members and other communitymembers. To be a viable vehicle for staff development and school improvement, theprocess must be conducted efficiently and take into account the unique characteris-tics of each school and community. It is suggeisted that the process be Implementedin three cycles. During the first cycle the planning team completes the entire pro-cess and develops action plans for improving several best practices in the followingyear. During the second cycle the team implements and evaluates progress on theaction plans. At the end of the second cycle the team decides to continue with thecurrent action,plans for the third cycle and/or select additional items to add to theaction plans. At the end of the third cycle, the team assesses progress on all actionplans and initiates the entire process again. The major tasks to be completed in theSchool Planning Team Process are depicted in a flowchart in Figure 1. Each box ofthe flowchart represents a major task to be completed by the team. The boxes arenumbered to correspond with the following descriptions of each task.
Task 1 Establish the School Planning Team
1?1 Who should be on the planning team and how can productivemeetings be facilitated?
The School Planning Team Process is intended for use by a team of personsrepresenting all of the school's constituents. For example, administrators, generaland special educators, related service providers. support staff, students, parents.school board members and other interested community members should all be
15
![Page 24: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
Figure 1
The School Planning Process
1 Establish theSchool PlanniDg/
Team
2 Review the Most CurrentBest Practice Guidelines
(16
(13 Tailor the School PlanningProcess to Meet theNeeds of the School
(117761r and Summarize Information onthe Level of Agreement and Need forImprovement of Best Practices from
School Administrators. Staff,Students. Parents, and Community
Members
Select and PrioritizeBest Practices to be
Improved
5Incorporate Information fromIndividual Student Planning
Teams into the Selection Process
DevelopAction Plans
( 8 Develop System Change,Policy/Procedure Change and lnservice
Training Summary Worksheets
V
( \\9 Coordinate the :Implementation of Action iPlans and Worksheets
(10 Assess Progress on ActionPlans and Select Additional Best
Practices for Improvement
Second Cycle
Third Cycle
164 4
![Page 25: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
invited to take part in the planning process. The School Planning Team Management Plan (Figure 2)can be used to identify team members and to assist the team to address several specific teammanagement issues. Issues addressed by the form are: the best day of the week, time and locationfor meetings; how childcare can be providedso that team members can be supported toattend meetings; and ways that the team canextend beyond itself to other school staff,parents, students, and community membersthroughout the planning process.
Optimal team size is between seven andten individuals. However, larger teams (up to16 people) have successfully completed theprocess. As team size increases, the timeindividual team members have to expresstheir views at meetings is reduced. Withlarger teams it is useful to break the teaminto smaller groups (e.g., 4 to 5 persons) todiscuss issues or to brainstorm possiblesolutions to problems. In order to keep teammeetings to a reasonable length of time(maximum of 2 hours) and to give everyonetime to express themselves, it is important touse collaborative teaming skills. The settingof team goals at the beginning of the teamingprocess and use of a School Planning TeamMeeting Worksheet (Figure 3) has been helpfulto many teams. Teams should identify afacilitator, timekeeper and recorder for each
Figure 2
School Planning Team Mariegement Plan
Behold Teen
geboot litsosios Tom Members paamehrlizems/pheas amber)thoolneeessore
Scheel Baud Nombre-
&lei Sae
Sarde
pemue.
Other Ceemsweg Weavers
truss ami eine MU Oa School Plmolog Team sses17
ol WeekTimer (torn toLocoman
will tem mambo. mulatto elattleare to order to soma mmtimss Too D N. Clyes. how velll the teet/e el childcare be addromed by the team?
How onII Jo T. keel. oilier. Wormed Awl octleit lupe thwoogloom Lb.olamlag promos?Sohoot StagStudentsParentsCommunity MembersSchool Bawd
School
Figure 3
School Planning Team Meeting Worksheet
Team Members Present:
Date
Team Members Absent: Information Backup
Roles:Facilitator
_ - _ -Fax This Meeting: For Next Meeting:
RecorderTimekeepertiscourager
Agenda far this meeting: Time Limit1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Agenda for the Neat meeting:
2.
Next Meeting Deite:
17
meeting, set an agenda with time limitsfor agenda items and stick to the agendaand time limits as much as possible. Allteam members should be responsible toeach other for completing group-tieks,helping each other to participate inplanning. and being comfortable witheach other and the process. Informationon collaborative teaming is described inChapter 5: Collaborative Teaming.
5
![Page 26: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
(Task 2 Review the Most Recent Best Practice Guidelines )How can the School Planning Team become familiar withbest practices?
The Best Practice Guidelines will be reviewed and updated regularly by theVermont Department of Education and the Center for Developmental Disabilities atthe University of Vermont to insure that the best practice statements remain cur-rent with advances in the field of education for all students. including those withintensive educational needs. The School Planning Team should determine that theyare using the most current set of best practice statements and surveys prior toinitiating the school planning process. Time should be spent reviewing and discuss-ing best practice statements to insure that all team members understand theirmeaning and purpose.
ITask 3 Tailor the School Planning Process to Meet the Needsof the School ... ;
How can the process be tailored to meet the unique needs ofeach local school?
The planning team should first review the School Planning Team Process de-scribed in this chapter. Next the team determines the tasks they will use to corn-
, plete the process and fillsout the Tasks to BeCompleted worksheetdepicted in Figure 4. Theworksheet provides a meansfor teams to tailor theplanning process to theirunique needs and timelines.To complete the worksheetthe team determines how,when and by whom eachtask will be addressed andwhen the team will meet toreview progress and makemodifications to the pro-cess.
Figure 4Tailoring the School Planning Team Process Tasks To Be Comp&tecl
School. Da e.mmeese
Teak How twill the taskbe addressed,
What?By whom?
Date of amtmeeting
Establish the SchoM Planning Teamwhich represents ell constituents ofthe school.
Review the most current BestPa.Mce Guidelines.
Mailer the School Planning P.-ocesato meet the needs of the school.
Gather end summarise Information onthe level of agreement and need forimprowsnern of test FracUme tramschool administrators. tuff, endstudents. parents. and communitymembers.
.
18
![Page 27: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
Task 4 Gather and Summarize Information on the Level of Agreementand Need for Improvement ot Best Practices from SchoolAdministrators, Staff, Parents, Students, andCommunity Members
How can information about best practices be gathered fromschool administrators, staff, students, parents, andcommunity members?
Information can be gathered many different ways. The use of the Best PracticeSurvey, however, has been found to be an efficient way to gather information from alarge number of persons in a relatively short period of time. A portion of the BestPractice Survey is depicted in Figure 5. The survey involves respondents makingthree responses for each statement. Respondents indicate if they agree with a bestpractice by circling I Agree. I Disagree or I'm Undecided. They indicate a need forimprovement on the best practice in their school by circling High Need. MediumNeed, Low Need, or Don't Know. Finally, they indicate if a best practice is a prior-ity for improvement, for whatever reason, by checking the box in columnl if apriority. The results of the survey are most accurate when respondents haveknowledge of the best practices. Ideally, the Best Practice Survey should not beadministered without respondents having an opportunity for training and discussionon them prior to or during the administration of the survey. The survey takesbetween fifteen and thirty minutes to complete.
Figure 5
5 EST PRACTICE GUIDELINES FOR MEETING THE NEEDS OF ALL STUDENTS IN LOCAL SCHOOLSNeed for Improvement
in Our Schoole, if
Priority
1 SCHOOL CLIMATE AND STRUCTURE
I. The school's philoor phy statement and objectives should be developed by ad minietrators, staff,students, parent., rchool board members and other community members and should reflect the school'scommitment to meting the individual needs of all students in ge-appropriate integrated school andcommunity setting..
I Agree I Disagree I'm Undecided
High Medium L. DeterINT...1 N." N." K...
Priority I0 I
I
i
2. The school's clir114te should be established by acimuustrators, staff, students, parents school boardmmibers and other cominunity members and should promote respect for individual differences amongstudents, encourage the development of positive self-esteem, ortablish high achievement expectationsfor all students, and encourage the development of canng personal relationships among students andstaff.
I Agree t Dissorse re. Usideeided
High Medium Low DealNe d Nerd Need Kam.
Priority II0 I
. . The school's code of conduct for students and staff should be established by administrators, staff,students, parent., school board members and other community members and should emphasizepositive behavior, be applied in a consistent, fair manner, and take into account the unique needs ofindividual students.
I Agree I Diorite* r. Wider:Wed
High Medium Lew DealNeed Nerd Noel Koss,
Prtacity
1
The school should provide ample opportunities for students, staff, parents, administrators, school boardmembem and other community members to be recognized for their accomplishments, including helpingothers.
I Agree I Disagree Van Undecided
High Med halin Lois Don'tNeel Need Need Know
Prier*, I0 1
I . The general roles and responsibtlities of II school staff (including contracted staff such as .noccupational therapist or psychologist) relative to providing inatniction and support to all studentsshould be cleer}y delinonted by adminietrators, staff, nudente, parents, school board members and othercommunity members.
I Apse I Disagree Vet Undecided
High Medium low Don'tNeed N.. Newel Kam.
1pri.,.ity i0 I
i
6. The school'. proteseional development process should be developed by iii1miniatnators, staff, students.parents, school board members and other community members and should include inservice training,regulsrly scheduled observationa with feedback, technical amistance, pear cooching, and mentonng.
I Area I Disagree I'm Undecided
High Medium Low Dvn't INsed N.el Need Knew
Nu...0y I3
. The school's instructional support system (e.g., classroom-based model for delivering support services,teacher aseetanor teem individual ctudent planmng teams, special education pre-referral process,volunteer syetem) should be developed by dmiroatrators, staff, students, parents, school boardmambas and other community members and should be available to all students and staff.
I Atom I Dimon. Fan Undedded
High Med ham Low Dori*Need N.4 N....i Km..
Prierky I0 I
IS
ST COPY AVAILABLE19
27
![Page 28: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
It should be noted that the responses to the Need for Improvement in OurSchool column are interpreted differently depending on whether or not the respon-dents agree with the best practice. If respondents agree w.'h the practice. circlinghigh need would indicate that they feel the practice is not available in the school or ifavailable is in much need of improvement. Circling low need indicates that therespondents feel the practice is adequately addressed in their school. On the otherhand, what if respondents disagree with the practice and indicates low need forimprovement? This may mean that they do not value the best practice and there islittle need to improve on it regardless of how available it is in the school.
How can survey responses be summarized?The Survey Summary Chart summarizes information gathered from the Best
Practice Survey in a format which highlights practices which have high levels ofsupport among school staff and are in need of improvement. The Survey SummaryChart is useful for summarizing survey information for presentation to school staff,administrators, parents, and the school board. When used in conjunction with theBest Practice Selection Worksheet., described in a later section. the Survey SummaryChart can help in the selection of statements for improvement.
Figure 8
Best Practice Survey Summary Chart
ThLewd of Need for
Lava of AFewnent Improvement in Our ofwith Indicator School Priority is
SCHOOL CUMATS AND STRUCTURE
1. The school's philosophy statanent and ohlectivesshould be developed by adatleletrattrs, guff, stu-demi:raft Waal board mambas aid alescoomiurdty rembees aid should reflect the school'scarralimerr to amming Ms individual nada a allvadat. in agrappropriase interred school andcommarly Wrap.
2. The school's climate should be erabialled by admin-Loran rat sesdans, parents school board own-an aid other coreromity members aid shouldpromote respect fa indirdual differences amongstudents, encourage the development of preibie self- IImem% establish high adievanent expectations for allstudents, aid encourage the development of camsperemal reiallaideps among misdates and sat
3. The school's mole of =duct for *Warm arid atechould be setabilabed by adarnetrators. staff, sou-dams, preen school bard smenbers and otherarralurity members aid should anphanse POSifiVebehavior, be applied in a madam. fair mannsr, andtake bro accord the urdque needs of Individualeturren
4. The dad should porde ample opportunities forstucksia. staff, perms, admisistraum. whoa boardmembers end cehr arterenity maniere to berecognised far tair accariplisimierts. includinghelping errs
S. The salad ram aul nepteribilities of all wheal stafffinduding oars t acted staff sod. as wi oaupetiondMaar.* or psydiolosist) relative to providinginetrualon and ripper to all madam should kedearly delimited by alminisionces, stet rudest;parser, salad bard nraibas and other aornmertywrens%
6. The sdicors profeesional dr ulopmant process shouldbe developed by adminisustors, gaff, madam.parer, school hard marbers aid other commadtymembers and simild include Inervice taring,regularly echedubd obsrvations with feedback.Wrier essistarce, pair Goldin& aid wereoring.
7. The school's instructional supper system (e.g.,dasacomberd model fa delivering support wry-ices, teacher smisurre mem individual swamplarning leans. spend editorial preeeferral proms,volwoiser 'yeller° Mould be developed by administre.ton. sta. ebalents. parents. schod board meeker'and other aurauwity tranbers arid should be avail-abie to till ruder and add.
% Alm% Dimple% Dii4icie,ed
% Aim% Disagree% UnstudiedI
% Ames% Meagre% Undecided
% AmeeV. Drawee% Undedeled
% AV"% DisagreeV. Uneledded
V. AV"% Di
% thettedded
V. Apee% Dila?"V. Uedecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Lew% Undecided
% High% Medium% LemII Undedded
V. HighV. MediumV. LewV. Undecided
% High% MediumV. LewV. Undecided
V. High% MediumV. Lew% Undecided
V. HighV. Medium,
5.10wV. Undcided
.
El
El
El
El
El
El
Ei
20
The Survey Summary Chartdepicted in Figure 6 summarizesthe following information.
1. The percentage of respon-dents who answered I Agree. IDisagree and I'm Undecided foreach best practice.
2. The percentage of respon-dents who answered High Need,Medium Need, Low Need. andUndecided to the need forimprovement of each practice.
3. The number of persons thatidentified each practice as apriority.
The I Agree responses toeach statement and High Needresponses may be color-coded toallow for quick scanning ofitems. Practices with high levelsof agreement and need (90% to100% of respondents answeringI Agree and High Need) mightbe coded red (hot item). Prac-tices with a moderate level ofagreement (50% to 89%) mightbe coded green (cool item) andpractices with a level of agree-ment under 50% might be codedblue (cold item).
28 BEST C1PY AVAILABLE
![Page 29: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
(Task 5 Incorporate Information From Individual Student Planning
Teams into the Selection Process
How can we address the needs of individual students in theplanning process?
If the school has working Individual Student Planning Teams for one or morestudents with intensive needs (see Chapter 4) information about best practice avail-ability for these students should be gathered from each team and incorporated intothe School Planning Team Process. Prior to developing an individualstudent's planthe team completes Part I of the Best Practice Checklist for Individual Students(Figure 7) by selecting which best practices are most important to the student'ssuccess within the school and community. After planning, the team completes PartII of the checklist by indicating which selected practices could not be incorporatedinto the student's program. The team then completes Part III by making recommen-dations for increasing the availability of those practices within the school/commu-nity. The practices which are needed by students with intensive needs but are notadequately available, should be highlighted during the best practice selection processdescribed on the next page.
Figure 7
BEST PRACTICE CHECKLIST FOR INDIVIDUAL STUDENTS
Student Date (Part I ) Date (Part MUD
SCHOOL CLIMATE AND STRUCTURE
1. The school's philosophy statement and obiectives are developed by administrators, staff, students,parents, school board members and other community members and reflect the school's commitment tomeeting the individual needs of all students in age-appropriate regular education and communitysettings.
2. The school's climate is established by administrators, staff, students, parents school board members and I!other community members and promotes respect for individual differences among students, encouragesthe development of positive self-esteem, establishes high achievement expectations for all students, and ,.
encourages the development of caring personal relationships among students and staff.
3. The school's code of conduct tor students and staff is established by administrators, sta if, students,parents, school board members and other community members, emphasizes positive behavior, isapplied in a consistent, fair manner, and takes Into account the unique needs of tndivtduai students.
4. The school provides ample opportunities for students, staff, administrators, parents, school boardmembers and other community members to be recognized for their accomplishments, including heipingothers.
5. The general roles and responsibilities of all school staff (including contracted staff such as an occu pa.tional therapist or psychologist) relative to providing instruction and se pport to all students are clearlydelineated by administrators, staff, students, parents, school board members and other communitymembers.
6. The school's professional development process is developed by administrators, staff, students, parents,school board members and other community members arid includes inservice training, regularlyscheduled observations with feedback, technical assistance, peer coaching, and mentohng.
7. The school's instructional support system (e.g., classroom-based model for delivering support services,teacher assistance team, individual student planning tONIMS, special education pre-reterral process,volunteer system) is developed by administrators, staff, students, parents, school board members andother community members and is available to all students and staff.
Importantto Student's
ProgramPart I
Practice Not AdeauatelvIncorporated intoStudent's Program
Part II
21Q
4 al
![Page 30: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
D}(Task 6 Select and Prioritize Best Practices to be Improved
How can the team select and prioritize best practices forimprovement?
This task in the planning process involves the completion of the Best PracticeSelection Worksheet and results in a prioritized list of best practices in need ofimprovement. When selecting practices for improvement it is important to considerthe level of support for the practice as well as the possible barriers to best practiceachievement. The more support there is for a practice among school staff, adminis-trators, students, parents and other community members, the more likely improve-ments in the practice will be achieved. When support for a practice is low, minimalimprovement may be expected unless efforts to increase support for the practice arelaunched. Two strategies to increase support for a best practice include providingmore information on the practice and its benefits, and creating incentives for imple-menting a practice (e.g., reduced class size for teachers working with students withintense needs).
The first step in completing the Best Practice Selection Worksheet is to identifyactices to be considered for improvement during the next two planning cycles. At
least 10 practices should be initially identified. As each practice is identified thesmall box on the worksheet located in the colunm titled Select should be checked(see Figure 8). After all of the practices have been considered, complete the ratings(as described below) and assign a priority ranking for each best practice.
1. Categorize the Possible Changes Needed: Circle P if policy changes are neededto improve the practice's availability. Circle S if service delivery system changes areneeded for improvement (e.g., reallocating teacher time, changing job roles, hiringadditional staff, arranging team meeting time during school hours. initiating acommunity-based training program). Circle T if training is needed to develop orimplement the changes.
2. Determine Priority Ranking: Based upon the information gathered through thesurveys and the estimation of the types changes needed, each practice should beranked from the most important practice to target for improvement (1= highestranking) to the least important. If several practices carry equal importance, theymay be assigned the same ranking. It is recommended that at least 10 statementsbe ranked.
Once best practices have been assigned a priority ranking, three or more prac-tices should be selected for improvement during the remainder of the current cycleand for the second cycle of the process. The exact number of practices selected willdepend upon the perceived difficulty of improving the practices and the amount ofstaff time allotted for their improvement. The initial selection should include somepractices which can be achieved relatively quickly and easily to ensure that staff.students, parents and other community members experience success in using theSchool Planning Team Process. The practices selected should be approved by theschool board, school staff and interested parents and other community membersprior to beginning the next task in the process.
22 30
![Page 31: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
(-Best Practice Selection Worksheet Figure 8Selected Changes Priority
Best Practice Guidelines For Meeting The Needs Of All Students In Local Schools Box) Needed (1 = Highest)
SCHOOL CLIMATE AND STRUCTURE
1. The school's philosophy statement and objectives are developed by administrators, staff.students, parents, school board members and other community members and reflect theschool's commitment to meeting the individual needs of all students in'age-appropriate regu-lar education and community settings.
2. The schoors climate is established by administrators. staff, students, parents school boardmembers and other community members and promotes respect for individual differencesamong students, encourages the development of positive self-esteem. establishes high :!achievement expectations for all students, and encourages thc development of caring personal ilrelationships among students and staff. :I
3. The school's code of conduct for studmts and staff is established by administrators, staff.students, parents, school board members and other community members, emphasizes posi-tive behavior, is applied in a consistent, fair manner, and takes Into account the unique needs I iof individual students.
.1
4. The school provides ample opportunities for students. staff, administrators, parents, schoolboard members and other community members to be recognized for their accomplishments.including helping others.
5. The general roles and responsibilities of all school staff (including contracted staff such as ancecupational therapist or psychologist) relative to providing instruction and support to allstudents are clearly delineated by administrators, staff, students, parents, school boardmembers and other community members.
6. The school's professional development process is developed by admmistrators, staff, students.parents, school board members and other community members and includes inservice train-ing, regularly scheduled observations with feedback, technical assistance, peer coaching, andmentonng.
7. The school's instructional support system (e.g.. classroom-based model for delivenng supportservtces, teacher assistance team, individual student planning teams, special education pre-referral prccess, volunteer system) is developed by administrators, staff, students, parents.school board members and other community members and is available to all students andstaff.
a
S P T
S P T
S P T
S ? I
S P T
S P T
S P T
S = Systems P = Policy or Procedures T = Training
1Task 7 Develop Action Plans
How do we develop plans for best practice improvement?
The development of action plans is a critical task since it forms the basis forimproving best practices. A separate action plan should be developed for each bestpractice selected for improvement. Each action plan should include the followingfour components (refer to Figure 9 for a sample action plan):
1. A listing of the Best Practices to be improved:
2. A listing of changes in school service delivery system needed to improvethe practice:
3. A listing of changes in school policy or procedures needed to improve thepractice: and
4. A listing of training needs (e.g.. for staff, students, the community) in orderto improve the practice.
![Page 32: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
The action plans should be written to address changes to be made during theremainder of the current cycle and for the second and third cycles as well. In otherwords, action plans should address changes that the team wishes to make by theend of the third cycle. If a cycle takes the school one year to complete. then theaction plans will cover two years (the second and third years of the process).
Figure 9Sample Action Plan
Area: Collaborative Planning
Best Practice Statement: 'The scho o provides time during .school fwurs for instructional* support teams(e.g., inclividua( stu&nt planning teams, teacher assistance teams, uaching teams) to meet atuf for individual teammembers to monitor services and to provide time for consultation, support and technical assistance.
Changes in Service Delivery(Systems Change)
Changes in Policy or Procedures(Policy Change)
Training Needs(Staff, Students, Community)
Identify teams of 4 to 6integrated staff.
Structure school day toallow for team meetings.
Restructure caseloads ofspecial education andChapter I.
Early release time fortraining.
Volunteer enrichmentprograms.
Make use of Mondayafternoons notcurrently utilized forplanning.
Develop descriptions ofplanning teams includingroles and responsibilities.
From the School Improvement Plan (1991) of 'Union School, Montpelier, Vermont
Collaborative Teaming.
Provide information toschool board regardingthe need for teams andhow they function.
Visit other schools. Havethem come talk to us.
24 3 2
j
![Page 33: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
(ITask 8 Complete Systems Change, Policy/Procedure Change andInservice Training Summary Worksheets
How can we coordinate action plans with other school planningactivities which are ongoing within the school?
Once action plans have been developed for individual best practices, the School.Planning Team should summarize the information in a format that facilitates theschool's coordination of all the systems change. policy change, and training activi-ties. For example, if the school has an existing inservice training committee, asummary of all training activities should be shared with this committee. A school'sadministrative planning team should have a summary of all the systems andpolicy/proceduir change activities.
The summarization can be accomplished by: a) listing all the systems changeactivities from each action plan on the Systems Change Summary Worksheet,b) listing all the policy or procedural change activities on the Policy Changes Sum-mary Worksheet, and c) listing all the training activities on the TrainingActivitiesSummary Worksheet. As illustrated in Figures 10 and 11, the Systems Change andPolicy Change Worksheets list all the changes from each action plan and specify thebest practices addressed, the type of change(s) needed, the steps to be taken toinitiate change, persons responsible for initiating the change, and expected comple-tion dates.
The Training Activities Summary Worksheet (Figure 12) should specify the prac-tices addressed, the target audiences, the training objectives for each audieme, thetrainers for each topic, the time/location/format for training, the expected measur-able outcomes of training, and the expected completion dates.
Figure 10Sample Systems Change Summary Sheet
ProposedSystemsChange
BestPracticesImpacted
Steps toInitiateChange
Person(s)Responsible
Projec tCompletion
Bate
Identify teams of 2,4,7,8,27,41 Gain board approval Principal 3/91
4 to 6 teachersIdentify teams with faculty Team 4/91
Structure schoolday to allow forteam meetings
Gain board approval
Develop schedule withfaculty
Principal
Team
3/91
4/91
![Page 34: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
ProposedPolicy/Procedure
Change
Figure 11Sample Policy Change Summary Sheet
BestPracticesImpacted
Steps toInitiateChange
ProjectPerson(s) Completion
Responsible Date
Develop descriptionsof planning teamsincluding roles andresponsibilities
2,4,7,8.27,41 Identify teams with faculty
Develop descriptions
Gain board approval
Team
Team
Principal
3/91
4/91
6/91
TrainingObjective
Staff, students andparents will betrained incollaborativeteaming strategies
Figure 12Sample Training Activities Summary Worksheet
BestPracticesImpacted
Audienceand
Trainers
TimeLocation
FormatExpectedOutcomes
DateCompleted
1,2,3,4,5,6, Administrators 5:30 3/1 Understand 4/30/91
7,8,10,15, Teachers 7:30 3/15 importance of18,44,45,46, Support Staff 3:30 4/2 collaborative47,48,49,50 Students 7:30 4/13 teaming
ParentsCommunity School Ability to(Trained ingroups of 20)Trainer:Mr. Nice
library
Large grouppresentation
team usingagenda format,shared roles,and commongoals
Small grouppractice
Task 9 Coordinate the Implementation of Action Plans and Worksheets
(2How can the plans of several schools within the schooldistrict be coordinated?
The summary worksheets may also be used to facilitate the coordination ofchanges and training activities at the school district and regional,levels. While it ismost appropriate to conduct the School Planning Team Process at the school buildinglevel, it may be equally important to develop or finalize plans at the district level toensure that efforts of individuaLschools are coordinated and no unnecessary dupli-cation occurs. For example, if six schools within a district indicate that staff trainingis needed in the area of collaborative teaming, that training could be arranged for theentire school district rather than on an individual school basis. If several schools
26
:3 4
![Page 35: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
need the assistance of a specialist in educating students with severe disabilities, thedistrict may decide to employ one specialist to serve several schools.
It may be advantageous to coordinate and implement some elements of thechange plans on a regional level. For-example, when attempting to access neededexpertise in remote regions where the population of students with intensive educa-tional needs is low, school districts caii col1lborate to hire hearing and visionspecialists, occupational and physical therapists. behavior specialists, job trainers,or employment placement specialists.
Timelines for planning activities within each school may need to be coordinatedat the school district or supervisory union level. School district administrators maywish to develop a general timeline with target dates for the completion of majorsteps in the process which allows for the coordination of individual school plans.This general timeline can be used by each school administration to develop a morespecific timeline for a particular school. In this way, timelines can be generatedwhich will take into consideration priorities and time constraints of individualschools, as well as the school district needs. A sample coordinated timeline ispresented in Figure 13.
Figure 13Sample Coordinated Timeline
By October 1 (Year 1)1. Present the best practice guidelines and an overview of the school planning process to the
school staff. students, parents and community members.2. Establish a School PlanMng Team in each school.3. Tailor the school planning process to meet the needs of each school.
By January 1 (Year 1)Each school will:
1. Identify staff, parents and community members to be surveyed.2. Conduct Best Practice Surveys.3. Tabulate survey results.4. Complete Survey Summary Chart.
By March 1 (Year 1)Each school will:
1. Gather information from Individual Student Planning Teams operating within the school(if any).
2. Complete the Best Practice Selection Worksheet.3. Select best practices for improvement for the next 2 years.4. Develop action plans and summary worksheets for the selected practices.
By March 15 (Year 1)Completed action plans and summary worksheets will be delivered to the school districtadministration.
By April 15 (Year 1)The school district administration will review the action plans and summary worksheets.develop a district-wide action plan, allocate necessary resources to complete the actionplans, and develop a schedule for action plan implementation.
By May 20 (Year 2 )1. Results of in-service training, policy change and/or systems change completed to date will
be evaluated.2. Each school will assess progress on statements targeted for improvement.
27
![Page 36: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
(Task 10 Assess Progress on Action Plans and Select Additional
Best Practices for Improvement for the Following Year],
EiHow do we continue to make progress from year to year?
On at least a yearly basis, the planning team should evaluate what progress hasbeen made on the targeted policy and systems changes as well as training activi-ties. The team should decide whether each action plan has been completed to thepoint where it need no longer be addressed. If action plans are completed by theend of the second year, additional plans and worksheets can be developed for thethird year. The team should go back to the Best Practice Selection Worksheetcompleted during the first cycle of the process and select additional practices toimprove. At least every 3 years the school should do the entire school planningprocess over again (re-prioritize best practices in need of improvement).
-
28 36
![Page 37: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
Summary ChartForms for Completing Each Task in the
School Planning 'ream Process
1 Estab?ish the SchoolPlanning Team
School Planning TeamManagement Plan
School Planning Team MeetingWorksheet
Team Member ChecklistTeam Goals
Review the Most CurrentBest Practice GuidelinesBest Practice Guidelines
3 Tailor the SchoolPlanning Process to Meetthe Needs of the School
Schooi Planning ProcessWorksheet
Gather and SummarizeInformation on the Level ofAgreement and Need forImprovement of Best Practicesfrom School Administrators,Staff, Students, Parents, andCommunity Members.Best Practice SurveysBest Practice Summary Chart
6. Select and PrioritizeBest Practices to beImproved
Best Practice Selection Worksheet
Develop Action Plans
Action Plan
Develop Systems Change,Policy/Procedure Changeand Inservice TrainingSummary Worksheets
Systems Change Summary SheetPolicy Change Summary SheetTraining Activities Summary
Worksheet
9 Coordinate theImplementation of ActionPlans and Worksheets
Incorporate Information fromIndividual Student PlanningTeams into the Selection Process
Best Practice Checklist for IndividualStudents
10 Assess Progress on ActionPlans and SelectAdditional Best Practicesfor ImprovementAction PlansSummary WorksheetsBest Practice Selection
Works hee t
29
![Page 38: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
CHAPTER I4
The Individual Student PlanningTeam Process
ti What is the Individual Student Planning Team Process?
The Individual Student Plan-ning Team Process is intended foruse by planning teams to developprograms which maximize partici-pation of students with intensiveneeds in general educationclasses and other school andcommunity activities. As de-scribed in Chapter 1. studentswith intensive needs are studentsidentified by their teachers andparents as presenting significanteducational challenges to theschool. A student need not beeligible for a specific supportservice (e.g., special education.Chapter 1) to be considered byteachers or parents as havingintensive needs and requiringindividualized support services.The planning process includes aseries of tasks to be accomplishedby the student's planning team.Various checklists, forms andsurveys have been developed toassist the planning team tocomplete the tasks. The planningprocess is depicted in the flowchart in Figure 1. Each num-bered box on the chart representsa major task to be completed bythe team.
altrnt
Figure 1
Individual Student Planning Team Process
Establish The Planning Team
a. Student Assigned toAge-appropriate Classes
b. Identify Team Membership
c. Facilitation of Family Participationon the Student's Planning Team
d. Development of Teaming Procedures
e. Tailor the Process to Meet the Student'sand School's Needs
Identify Fundamental Values, TheStudent's Strengths, Best Practice Needs and
Skills to be Taught
vComplete the Activities Matrix
(Are Assigned Classe.)Appropriate?
Yes
4 Determine Support Tasks
Monitor Progress and Evaluate theAvailability of Best Practices to the
Student's Program
The Individual Student Planning Team Process is an abbreviated and adapted version of the Indi-vidual Program Design (IPD) Series which is available from the Center for Developmental Disabili-ties at the University of Vermont, Burlington, Vermont 05405.
30
38
![Page 39: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
(Task 1 Establish the Planning Team
1? iHow can the Individual Student Planning Team Process beinitiated?
Once a student has been identified as having intensive needs. an IndividualStudent Planning Team should be established. Establishing the planning teaminvolves addressing several key issues prior to discussing the student's specificeducational strengths and needs. Issues to be addressed include:
a. student assignment to age-appropriate general education classes.b. identification of team membership.c. facilitation of family participation on the student's planning team.d. development of teaming procedures. ande. adaptation of the process to meet the student's needs.
(Task la Student Assigned to Age-appropriate Classes
1?1Does the student have to be assigned to general educationclasses?
Yes! The Individual Student Planning Team Process is designed to supportstudents with intensive needs in general classes. Students should be in the sameclasses as their peers of a similar chronological age (plus or minus 2 years). Ifstudents are assigned to a special classroom or are not currently attending theirlocal schools, the first step in the process is to assign the student to general educa-tion classes in their local school.
(Task lb Identify Team Membership
traWho should be on the Individual Student Planning Team?
The Individual Student Planning Team should have core and extended teamcomponents. The core team is a small group of people (e.g., student, parents,general educators, special educator, speech pathologist) who meet regularly (manycore teams meet weekly) to do the majority of the day-to-day planning for the stu-dent. The core team is generally madeup of the people who are the most involvedwith the student on a daily basis.
Extended team membership consists of individuals who are important to thestudent's educational program and are available to the team as needed (e.g., clinicalpsychologist, social worker, student's peers). Core and extended team membershipwill change over time based on the needs of students and the classes/activities inwhich they will participate. For example. as a student moves from grade to gradedifferent teachers will have to be involved. When transitions to post-school servicesare being planned, post-school service providers should be included. One functionof the planning team is to continuously update team membership based uponstudent needs.
The Team Management Plan (Figure 2) can be used to designate core and
31
![Page 40: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
extended team membership. to facilitate communication among team members andto decide how the team will work together. For more detaf.r.'d information on collabo-rative teaming and how to use the Team Management Plan refer to Chapter 5:Collaborative Teaming.
Figure 2
( Team Management Plan
Student
Core Planning Team Members
Year
Position
Extended Planning Team Members Position Info. Backup
fWhen will the the Team meet during the school year?
Core Team: Erteaded Team:Day of Week Day of WeekTime TimeWeekly 0 Weekly 0Every Other Week 0 Every Other Week 0Other Monthly 0
Other
If additional meetings (core or extended) arc needed who will be responsibleranging them?
If the student or his/her parents cannot attend meetings, how will the teamthem informed and solicit their inpur?
for ar-
keep
Who is the primary parent contact person?
If a teaching assistant is assigned, who is primarily responsible for supeassistant?
wising the
Who is primarily responsible for monitoring the students:
physical management needs?behavior management strategies?social integration strategies?transitions between activities/classes?
ElWhich general class teachers should be team members?
11
The core team should include the student's general class teachers. If the studenthas several teachers (e.g., high school students may have up to seven teachers), one
324 0
![Page 41: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
or two teachers may be designated as core team members. Previous and potentialnext year's teachers should be included as extended team members to facilitatesmooth transitions from one grade to the next. When it is difficult to decide on, forexample, a thTd grade classroom for a-student, several third grade teachers mayneed to be on the team until the matrixing process (Task 3 ) is completed.
lc Facilitation of Family Participation on the Student'sPlanning Team
1-41How can we encourage the student's family to participate inthe planning process?
One way to facilitate family involvement is to include them from the beginningon the Individual Student Planning Team as full team members and decision mak-ers. As full team members, the family is invited to and informed of all team meet-ings and activities. Family participation at team meetings may be encouraged bydesignating one team member as a family contact person who meets with the familybefore the first team meeting and periodically thereafter. The family contact personshould be responsible for initially explaining the planning process to the family,obtaining their input on the process and team composition. and encouraging theirinvolvement as team members. The family contact person should arrange ameeting(s) with the family to accomplish the following tasks:
a. Discuss the need for an Individual Student Planning Team for their child.
b. Discuss how the individual support team works, what it hopes to accom-plish, and how the family can participate.
c. Encourage the family to bring a friend or advocate to team meetings toease them into the process. When appropriate, the family contact personshould suggest names of other parents familiar with the process who couldprovide support at meetings.
d. Discuss how one goal of the team is to provide support to the family as wellas their child through providing Family Information and Referral Services.
e. Secure family input on the Individual Student Planning Team Process fortheir child, the composition of the core and extended team, and how theywould like to be involved.
f. Facilitate the family discussing selected fundamental values that guideeducational program development for all students and identifying thevalues which the family would like the team to give special considerationto in the development of their child's program.
g. Facilitate the family discussing and selecting high priority education goalsfor their child.
What are Family Information and Referral Services?
I
The purpose of Family Information and Referral Services is to assist families toaccI ess informal support networks and connect them with community resourcesI(e.g.. daycare services, recreation programs. counseling, respite care, vocationalrehabilitation, mental health). In order to provide Family Information and Referral
3341
![Page 42: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
(Task ld Development of Teaming Procedures)
i?!
Services, the school should consider developing a community resource guide whichlists generic family needs and identifies potential people and agencies to contact toaddresS those needs. Assistance accessing resources should be available to allfamilies whose children attend the school.
The Individual Student Planning Team should address families' questions, con-cerns and needs in areas related to their child's educational program (e.g.. facilitat-ing communication skill development, managing behavior, encouraging more inde-pendence in self-care at home). However, some families have other needs which canbest be addressed by accessing available community services. Upon the familiesrequest, the Individual Student Planning Team should assist them in identifyingneeds and/or connecting them to community resources whin can address specificfamily needs.
How can the family contact person facilitate the family'sidentification of values which they want the team to give specialconsideration to in their child's program?
The Fundamental Values Worksheet should be reviewed with the student andher family. This worksheet and how to use it are described in detail in a latersection. During the review, the family contact person should facilitate the familydiscussing each value area. The family can add other value areas which they wantthe team to focus on. If the family will be attending the first team meeting, theyshould be encouraged to prepare for the meeting by thinking about value areas onwhich they would like the team to focus. If the family will not be attending themeeting, they should be asked to fIll out the worksheet and/or discuss priorityvalue areas with the family contact person so their priority areas can be shared withother team members.
How can the family contact person facilitate the family'sselection of skills to be taught to their child?
The Skills to Be Taught Worksheet should be reviewed with the student and herfamily. This worksheet and how to use it are described in detail in a later section.During the review the family contact person should facilitate the family discussingthe student's strengths and needs in relation to each skill domain. The family canadd other skill areas which they want the team to focus on. If family members willbe attending the first meeting, they should be encouraged to prepare for the meetingby thinking about which domains and skill areas are highest priorities for theirchild. If family members will not be attending the meeting, they should be asked tofill out the worksheet and/or discuss priority domains and skill areas with thefamily contact person so their priority skill areas and domains can be shared withother team members.
How do we become an effective team?
Two important tasks the core team should address early in the process are thesetting of team and individual tom member goals and the identification of theprocedures that will be used to facilitate efficient and productive meetings. In orderto tv;e time effectively (some teams meet for as little as 30 minutes at a time), teamshave utilized a Team Meeting Worksheet (Figure 3) to keep meetings on task and
34 42
Vow
P.
![Page 43: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
improve the collaborative nature of the team. The Team Meeting Worksheet providesteams with a format for keeping track of who is at each meeting, identifying infor-mation backups for absent members, specifying team member meeting roles, delin-eating agenda items with time limits, keeping minutes, and assigning tasks to teammembers. For more detailed information on goal setting and on how to use theTeam Meeting Worksheet refer to Chapter 5: Collaborative Teaming.
Figure 3
Team Meeting Worksheet
Student
Team Members Present:
Date
Team Members Absent: Information Backup
Roles: For This Meeting: For Next Meeting:FacilitatorRecorderTimekeeperEncourager
Agenda for this meeting: Time Limit1.
2.
3.
Agenda for the Next Meeting: Next Meeting Date1.
2.
Minutes TaskPerson(s) CompletedResponsible B ate
Task le Tailor the Process to Meet the Student's and School's Needs
1?1How can the planning process be adapted to meet the uniqueneeds of the student and school?
Another important task to be completed at the first team meeting is a core teamreview of the planning process outlined in this chapter to determine how the pro-cess might be adapted to meet their needs. For example, the team may decide towork on some tasks concurrently, eliminate some tasks and/or add tasks. Afterthe team determines the tasks necessary to complete the process, it can fill out theAdapting the Student Planning Process worksheet depicted in Figure 4. Completing
35 43
![Page 44: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
(Adapting the Student Planning Process )
the worksheet involves the team checking tasks to be completed, crossing off tasksthat the team will not address and adding additional tasks as necessary.
Figure 4
I Tasks to be completed. Cross out tasks which the team will notcomplete. List additional tasks the team will complete.
Task I Establish the Planning Teama. Student Assigned to Age-appropriate Classes 0
b. Identify Team Membership 0
c. Facilitation of Family Participation on the Students Team
d. Development of Teaming Procedures
Task 2 Identify Fundamental Values, the Student's Strengths,Best Practice Needs and Skills to be Taught
Identify Fundamental Values 0
Identify Students Strengths and Eduaitional Needs 0
Identify Skill Areas to Be Taught 0
Identify Best Practice Needs 0
Task 3 Complete the Activity Matrix 0
Task 4 Determine Support Tasks 0
Task 5 Monitor Progress and Evaluate the Availability ofBest Practices to the Student's Program
Monitor Progress 0
Evaluate Best Practice Availability 0
Task 6 Transition to Next Grade 0
![Page 45: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
Task 2 Identify Fundamental Values, the Student's Strengths,Best Practice Needs and Skills to be Taught
How can the team identify fundamental values to address in thedevelopment of the student's program?
Value judgements are involved in educational program development for allstudents. Each goal selected for a student implies a very real cost in terms of timeand resources that can be devoted to other, perhaps equally or more important,
goals. Since each decisionrepresents a cost, it is veryimportant that the student'sand her family's values arerepresented in the decision-making process. The values ofthe student and family are notonly important to making gooddecisions, but also to whethergoal attainment and skillacquisition have effects out-side of the school's program.
The Fundamental ValuesWorksheet in Figure 5 depictsselected areas the teamshould attend to in overallprogram planning for allstudents. The value areas arepartially based upon a studyby Giangreco. Cloninger, Yuan& Ashworth (1991) on parent-derived high priority needs ofstudents with intensive needs.Other areas should be addedon the basis of the student'sneeds and at the discretion ofthe family and other teammembers. Through discuss-ing the value areas in relationto a particular student'sstrengths and needs, a frame-work for selecting goals/skillsand designing activities for thestudent can be developed.Selecting areas to which theteam should pay particular
attention provides a greater focus for the team's efforts. For instance, if the area ofsocial acceptance/friendships is selected, the team should select goals/skills anddesign activities for the student which maximize opportunities to learn and practicesocial skills and develop friendships. Priority areas can be designated by eitherchecking the box after the area or assigning each box a number with the highestpriority being assigned the number one, the second priority being assigned thenumber two, and so on. The team should discuss and determine which system bestmeets their needs.
Figure 5
( Fundamental Values )Student Date
Each of tits value areas fisted below should be an in ugrat part of every student's educa tional evenence.We will attempt to insure that the selected value 00145 art incorporated vuo every actrvity and
erperienct that the student engages tn as a part of kis educational program.
Select V) Up to Three Value Areas Which are of Particular Importance to This Student:
Academics 0 Camerna
Social Acceptance/Friendships 0 CAMMOW:
Health/Safety
Self-Concept/Self-Esteem 0 C""
Choice Making
Self-Control/Self-Management 0
Inclusion in Integrated Activities 0 COvi
LOther (Specify):
37 45
![Page 46: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
laHow can the team determine the student's strengths andeducational needs?
First the team must determine the areas, if any, for which the student requiresan assessment of strengths and educational needs. If the student is well known tothe team or has had a recent assessment, further assessment may not be necessaryat this time.
There are four basic information gathering procedures for assessing studentstrengths and needs. These procedures include review of previous records. inter-views, observational assessments and training-based assessments. Each procedurehas both strengths and weaknesses and must be used in combination to obtain themost accurate information. Typical steps in an information gathering process are tofirst review the student's records and then to conduct interviews to check their
accuracy and to obtain addi-tional information. Next,
Figure 6
( Student Assessment Worksheet )Student Date
AreaS To Be Person(*) To BeAssessed Responsible Completed By
'Review of Records
i
'Interviews (specify instrument)'Parents -I
;Current Teachers (Hst persons and inv_ruments)
ll'1
.
1 .
Fast Teachers (ha persons and specify instruments)I.
:2.
13. .
'Others (list persons and specify instruments1i I.;
i2.1
;
iObservational AssessmentsIlaieited (list specific Instruments)11.12.3.4.5.
;
Non-alicitalICIassroorn 0Cafeteria 0Playground 0
'Home 0'other Ma)11.
12.
'Training-Based Assessments (describe).
II
:
observational assessments andtraining-based evaluations areconducted to fill in remaininginformation gapS.
There are two types ofobservational assessments,elicited and non-elicited. Bothtypes should be used to deter-mine student strengths andneeds. Non-elicited observa-tional assessment can also beused to assess social validityand student performance as afunction of environmentalvariables. Elicited Observa-tional Assessment evaluatesthe on demand performance ofstudents when they are givenspecific instructions to performthe skill of concern. Non-Elicited Observational As-sessment evaluates thestudent's ability to self-initiateskill performance when notgiven specific instructions toperform the skill.
Training-based assessmentinvolves providing instructionand assessing the student'sperformance during and afterinstruction. Students shouldbe provided training-basedassessments to determinelearning styles, needed instruc-tional adaptations, and learn-ing rates.
Figure 6. the StudentAssessment Worksheet, pro-vides the team with a means to
II identify areas to be assessed, assessment techniques and instruments, personsII responsible, and timelines for completing the assessment.
38
4 6
![Page 47: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
( Skill Areas To Be Taught )
How can the team select skills to be taught to the student?
It is important to make a distinction between priority skill areas and annual11 and short term goals and objectives. Priority skill areas can take more than one
year to accomplish andshould be selected becausethey will facilitate studentsmeeting critical environ-mental demands, such aspurchasing goods or mak-ing and maintaining friend-ships. Annual or shortterm goals and objectives,such as counting money ormaking a grocery list, areoften based upon a predic-tion of what a student willlearn in a school year andmay be necessary butinsufficient for meeting anenvironmental demand.Ideally. annual or shortterm goals should beselected because they arenecessary for achievingexpertise in priority skillareas. When priority skillareas have not been deter-mined for individualstudents there is not anadequate framework forselecting annual or shortterm goals and objectives,monitoring studentprogress, and facilitatingteachers building on skillsstudents learned in thepast within a priority skillarea.
The Skill Areas To BeTaught worksheet shouldassist the family and otherteam members to selectpriority skill areas for the
student. A page from the worksheet is depicted in Figure 7. The entire worksheetcovers the following domains: basic communication, language, social relationships/self management, motor, reading, writing, math, personal care, safety, dining/food.clothing care, home care, money management, school inclusion, vocational, andrecreation. The listing of skill areas under each domain helps define what it covers.Team members may add skill areas as necessary.
The first step in completing the worksheet is to determine the student's nextmajor transitions. For example, a student may be entering middle school withinthe next two years or transitioning to post-school life (e.g., a job, apartment living)four years from now. There may be skills that the tudent needs to learn in orderto be successful within next environments that should be targeted as priority skillareas now.
S'AtdentCompleted byNext Major Transition(s)
Figure 7
Dat
Basic Communication[show preferences, indicate more, indicate rejection/protest, indicatewants/needs, initiate socially, respond to social intitations, participate inturn taking, make choices other:
Languagefollow directions, receptive vocabulary, expressive vocabulary, length ofutterance, articulation, categories, relational concepts, temporalelations, opposites other:
Social Relationships/Self Managementprosocial skills (e.g., participation, know feelings, offer assistance,salutations, questioning, praise, cooperative, work/study habits, deal withanger, use self control, follow rules, avoid trouble, say no, make a decision,solve problems), relate information, quality of communication, eye contact,facial expressions, posture, interpersonal distance, physical appearance,hygiene, physical contact, social anonymity, family life, follow personalschedule, create schedule other:
Motororal motor, posture/position, pichension, pointing, manipulation,mobility other:
Readingsurvival words, signs or labels, schedules, maps, listings, illustratedadvertisements, instructions, forms, books, word attack skills, formalreading programs other:
writinghold pencil, color, trace, copy, write single letters, write numbers,write words, write thoughts, write paragraphs, write stories, bookreports, research reports other:
PriontyDomain
TrtorttyDornaut
EJ
PriontyDomain
Pnoritys\ 'Domain
ci
PnontyDomatn
C3
'PnontyDomain
ci
39 47
![Page 48: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
The next step in completing the worksheet is for the team to discuss thestudent's strengths, value areas, transition and other needs as related to each skilldomain. Priority domains can then be designated by either checking the box afterthe domain or assigning each box a number with the highest priority being assignedthe number one, the second highest priority being assigned the number two, and soon. Next the team can select high priority skill areas in each priority domain byeither underlining one or more of the listed skill areas or writing in additional skillareas.
How can the team incorporate best educational practices into thestudent's plan?
To facilitate incorporation of best practices (refer to Chapter 1) into an individualstudent's plan, the team should complete Part I of the Best Practice Checklist forIndividual Students (Figure 8) prior to developing the plan. The team can use theworksheet to select which best practices are most important to the student andfamily. As will be described later, the team should complete Parts II and III of thechecklist after the student's plan has been implemented.
Figure 8BEST PRACTICE CHECKLIST FOR INDIVIDUAL STUDENTS
Student Date (Part I ) Date (Part MID)
SCHOOL CLIMATE AND STRUCTURE
1. The school's philosophy statement and objectives are developed by administrators, staff, students,parents, school board members and other community members and reflect the school's commitment tomeeting the individual needs of all students in age-appeopriate regular education and communitysettings.
2. The school's climate is established by administrators, staff, students, parents, school board members andother community members and promotes respect for individual differences among students, encouragesthe development of positive self-esteem, establishes high achievement expectations for all students, andencourages the development of caring personal relationships among students and staff.
3. The school's code of conduct for students and staff is established by administrators, staff, students,parents, school board members and other community members, emphasizes positive behavior, isapplied in a consistent fair manner, and takes into account the unique needs of individual students.
Importantto Student's
ProgramPart I
Practice Not AdeauatelvIncorporated intoStudent's Program
Part Il
(Task 3 Complete the Activities Matrix
What process can we use to determire which student needs canbe met through each general class activity?
The Activities Matrix depicted in Figure 9 is a tool for assisting teams in address-ing student needs through general class acUvities. At this point the team shouldcomplete the vertical column labeled Skill Areas by listing each selected priorityskill area. It must be noted that all selected priority skill areas will be considered forinstruction during the first year. However, it may not be possible to address allthese priority skill areas within a single school year. Those priority skill areas whichare not addressed the first year may be addressed in subsequent years.
4048
![Page 49: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
In the horizontal row labeled General Education Activities, list the regularlyscheduled activities for the general classroom or classes to which the student isassigned (e.g., opening exercises, history-lecture. history-discussion, math-largegroup, math-independent work. librarT, lunch, recess, transitions between activi-ties). In a later step, this list of activities will be used to generate an individualizedstudent schedule. In order to generate a schedule, adhere to the followingconventions:
1. List the activities in the order in which they typically occur.
2. Do not merely list classes. List the major regularly scheduled activities for theclass. For example, reading could be a class with two major activities of small
c
Student Grade:
Figure 9ACTIVITIES MATRIX
Date:
**AlternativeActivities
Listed by Number 1. 1. Other Activities,.
Nome/Tangly,
REGULAREDUCATIONACTIVITIES
I. *I 2
A i
g o.../ G
: S 2i I j
ei _ta. 151
liiiliftli
1
i el
cl
Length of Time forActivity
45 10 20 15 45 45 45 20 25
Fundamental Values I V V l V I , iGeneral Ed. Content r r r r r r
Curriculum Adaptations V V V /Accommodations V
SKILL AREAS i I
Make Choices X
X
X_XXXX XTIC XXICIC X if
X X X X X
XXX
X
Follow DirectionsExpressive Vocab
i
oiReceptive Vocab A X X X X X X
Participaton X X X X X XSalutations X X XXX X
Cafeteria Use xPurchase Groceries x I X
1
SkiflAreas and GeneratEducation activities depicted in this example arc not intended to represent a child's complete program but
merely to demonstrate how to fill out an activity matrix,
group instruction and independent work. In this case iist in an abbreviated formread- sm gr and read-id wk. If social studies has major activities of discussionand lecture, list soc st-dls and soc st-lec. If there is only one regularly sched-uled activity or the activities vary significantly from session to session, just listthe class.
3. If some major activities occur more than once a day (e.g.. recess), list eachoccurrence.
414 9
![Page 50: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
4. If the activity does not take place daily. indicate the days of the week on which itoccurs. For example. if art is on Monday and Wednesday write - Art M,W.
5. In the time column under each activity, indicate its length (e.g., 1 hr., 20 mM.).
ElWhat are the "Other Activities" columns used for?
The columns labeled Other Activities are used to address activities other thangeneral class activities needed by the student. Examples of other activities include:a) non-instructional activities which accommodate student needs (e.g.. hearing aidchecks, taking medication, tube feeding): b) instructional activities which the teamhas identified as needing to take place in community-based training sites (e.g..grocery shopping, job training): and c) specialized services which do not fit intogeneral education activities (e.g.. individual counseling sessions). Each activity andits approximate duration should be listed in the Other Activity columns.
EiHow do we select activities to address fundamental values andpriority skills?
This section has been written in steps in order for team members to betterunderstand the process of using the Activities Matrix. After reviewing the steps theteam may decide to merge or simplify them. Note: The Activity Compatibility Plan.which is described later, should be completed when team members are undecidedas to whether or not a student's fundamental value and priority skill area needs canbe addressed through an existing general class activity. It may also be used whenthe team needs a structured process for identifying accommodations and/or adap-tations for a class or activity. This plan was developed to be a tool for teachingteams to develop accommodations for students.
Step 1. Consider the first general class activity and determine if any of the funda-mental values can be addressed through that activity. If yes, put a check in the boxwhere the activity column and the fundamental values row intersect.
Step 2. Determine whether or not the student will require curri'Ailum adaptationsin order to benefit from the content taught through the activity. For example, if thesubject is sixth grade social studies, will the student be expected to learn the samecontent as other students involved in the activity. If not, the team should discussways in which the content may be adapted to meet the needs of the student. Forexample, the student may be expected to learn a sub-set of the content (class has16 goals, student is to learn 4 of them) or the student may learn different content(class learns to read city map, student learns map of school). The recorder shouldcheck or describe selected adaptation strategies on the Activity Selection Worksheet(Figure 10). If the team decides that the student will be responsible for learning thesame content as other students, check the box where the activity column and thegeneral education content row intersect on the Activity Matrix. If the student re-quires curriculum adaptations, check the box where the activity column and thecurriculum adaptations row intersect. If the student will not be learning the generaleducation content, leave both boxes blank.
Step 3. Determine if the student will need accommodations (e.g., the student mightneed different materials, to take tests orally, peer tutor, to sit in the front of theroom) in order for the student to participate. The recorder should make a list ofpossible accommodations suggested by the team on the Activity SelectionWorksheet. If accommodations will be required, check on the matrix the box wherethe activities column and the accommodations row intersect.
4250
![Page 51: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
Figure 10
Activity Selection Worksheet
Student
Activity/Class
Date
Cenieuisma Adaptatlenst
The student trill learn all of the general education content. 3
lhe student 91111earn sub set of the content. 0
The mordent will learn different content from the same content area.
lhe student will not learn the general education content. 0
Other adaptations 01.11:
Specific Skills from Priority Skill Areas to be Addressed:
Accommodations:
Figure 11
(Class/Activity Summary Form
Teacher: Activity/Clue:
Student: Year Quarter: 1st 0 snit 0 3rd 0 4tk 0
Items Addressed Zack Weak)Student's General Education Outcomes: Week 1 1 3 4 5 41 7 9
Priority Skill Area:
I
Accommodations:
This form was initially developed by Marcy Tox, Integration Facilitator,EssetIanction, 'Vermont
4351
![Page 52: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
Step 4. Determine which priority skill areas can be addressed through the activityor during the transition time before or after the activity. In order to make thisdetermination team members need to delineate specific student skill needs withinthe skill area that could be addressed through the activity. For example. if Partici-pation was selected as a social communication skill area, specific participation skillsor routines (e.g., appropriately initiates interactions, asks for help) that could beaddressed through the activity need to be determined. The recorder should make arunning list of specific skills generated by the team on the Activity SelectionWorksheet. If a priority skill area can be addressed through the activity, check thebox where the activity column and the priority skill area row intersect.
Step 5. Decide whether the student will take part in the activity. If the teamdecides that the student will not take part in an activity, draw a line through theactivity name.
If the team decides that the student will take part in the activity, the team mustdetermine which initial general education outcomes, priority skills and accommoda-tions will be addressed through the activity. Review the Activity SelectionWorksheet, and add and delete specific skills, curriculum adaptations or accommo-dations until the team has come to consensus on which skills will be addressed andwhich curriculum adaptations and accommodations will be made during the activ-ity. Next, if the team has determined that the student should learn at least some ofthe general education curriculum content, the team should identify some initialoutcomes (e.g.. read a map of the school, identify five basic food groups, count to20) for the student. This information may now be written on the Class/ActivitySummary Form (see Figure 11). This form provides the teacher responsible for theactivity/class with a record of the skills that the student should be learning duringthe activity/class. At the end of each week, the teacher can check those outcomesor skills that were addressed during the week. This can assist the team to keeptrack of which skills are being taught or practiced across classes/activities. Asgeneral education units or themes change throughout the school year, additionalgeneral education outcomes can be added to the form. Each class/activity formshould be reviewed and revised at least quarterly by the team. This form can also beused to monitor progress on specific skills (see Task 5: Monitor Progress andEvaluate the Availability of Best Practices to the Student's Program).
Step 6. Repeat this process for each General Class and Other Activity.
tiWhat is the Home/Family column used for?
The Home/Family column is used to indicate student fundamental values andpriority skill areas that will be addressed through activities in the student's home.Consider each skill area and determine if one or more home activites will be used toteach, generalize, or maintain the skill area through school staff providing directinstruction or consultation and training to the student's family. If the activity willbe a school supported activity, put an X in the box intersecting the Home/Familycolumn and the skill area row.
How do we fit in the "Other Activities"?
At this point in the process-the team has determined which general educationactivities/classes the student can participate in. Since a student cannot attend allof the general class activities Old participate in other activities such as groceryshopping in the community, the team must make choices between general class
44
52
![Page 53: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
activities and other activities. If one or more general class activities were crossedoff by the team, these activities can be replaced with other activities. For example.if the team decided that few of the student's priority skill areas could be accom-plished during a 45 minute history lecture period, this period could be used toteach the student to use the corner grocery store. This decision can be indicated onthe matrix by assigning a number to each other activity (e.g., 1. groc.!ry shopping)and writing the number above one of the crossed out general class activities in theAlternative by Number row. To fit all critical other activities into the student'sschedule, additional general class activities may need to be crossed offor some ofthe other activities eliminated. The planning team may have to make some difficultchoices between general class activities and other activities. The values frameworkdeveloped for the student's program and the student transition needs should pro-vide a basis for making these choices. By the end of this task, all general classactivities, other activities and home activities in which the student will participateshould have been identified.
What if the team decides that the student's assigned classes arenot appropriate for the student?
If. after completing the Matrix and Activity Compatibility Plans, the team decidesthat the class assignment is not the most appropriate for the student (e.g.. mostgeneral class activities are crossed off, or at a secondary level one or more classesare deemed inappropriate) the team should recommend that the student's class-room/class assignments be changed. A Matrix may be completed for each alterna-tive general education classroom or class to determine which would be mostbeneficial to the student.
What is the Activity Compatibility Plan?
The Activity Compatibility Plan provides a structured process for identifyingaccommodations and/or adaptations for a class or activity. The form (Figure 12)provides a vehicle for team members to consider the following:
1. the outcomes of the activity for the class or group and whether or not thoseoutcomes would benefit the target student:
0. the outcomes for the target student and whether or not those outcomes areregularly used or practiced by students during the activity or class:
3. the current arrangement of the activity (e.g.. large group, small group-teacherdirected, independent work), the type of arrangement best suited to the student,and whether changes in arrangements would be necessary to include the stu-dent in the activity:
4. the current teaching methods used in the activity, teaching methods necessaryfor teaching the student. a-id whether changes in teaching methods would benecessary to include the student in the activity:
5. the current materials used, materials that the student would need to use andnecessary changes in materials: and
6. the current response modc for the group (e.g., marking choices, writing shortanswers, expressing thoughts and feelings), the student's response mode, andwhether the response modes should be changed.
45 53
![Page 54: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
After team members complete the plan, they brainstorm and list options foradapting the activity or class to accommodate the needs of the student. Afterbrainstorming, team members consider and select options. See Chapter 5: Col-laborative Teaming for information on brainstorming.
Figure 12
ACTIVITY COMPATIBILITY PLAN
Otatlaat Mos ToadiesDoes the Activity havelestrectiseal Vales,
I. 1. Yet No2. 2. Yes No3. 3. Yes No
4. Yea NoS. 5. Yee No6 6. Yet No
Deeesipties Class Aetivities (e.g.. lecture. dr111)
OUTCOMES FOR GROUTIMO= CAW
12211172T
OUTCOMES FOR STUDENTOMER WITDILDTSDIZ/PIACTICILDUENCI CLAM
ARRANGEMENT
Lathe GroupSmall Grow - Tucker WaledSeca Group - Student WooedCootereuve Group
0311211:WILY17SID DI TIMDROOP
PTVDOTCMTONI DI
CIAX0118'mom I
Indeperuket1:1 m a Small Gaup CoteauOther:
TEACHING METHODS
Verbal DUNG bad
camurrimVIM DI MCMOD"
St7DDICIff CMmanertr IMOD
CDANDIOMEDD=
LammQueatlorangOiscusmonTeed= Dotocatatrallon / Morelceueques
DM mad PrecuceComputer AtcleclShame1-adeng
That delayWoe
MATERIALS
R. hew
CLIZILLITTLYDM DI MXMOOT
_
CIIIMOIUSMSOND
IIITUDIIIIT CMMEOW MIMI
PbolotritesMmatwe ObliciaLae DemurWork Books ) Wok ShamTeatimesAudio t VassalCoormea Espana=Paw cid Peoc0Toot FormaOther
Commie
46
JEST COPY AVAILABLE 5 4Wo
![Page 55: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
STUDENT RESPONSE
Figure 12 Con't
CURREN= STUDENT ICHANGESUSED IN GROUFl CAN USE 'NEEDED
:ouchPtck Up: Lunt AtMark ChoiceDraw Line to Connect
nderluveolor
Write Short AnswersWnte Long bxerctsswnie Numerals, Math Problems:Abel ItemsReply "Yes/No- or "Don't Know"Simple Words or PhrasnsSay Short AnswersRe4d Aloud:.spress thoughts anu beelinesMake Formal Presentationst Aber
CommcntS Adaptations/Changes
StudentClass Teacher Date_
4
e
et
---Evaluation Questions
WU] che selaptatlews/ehhagee::how nesostne atunuon to the student'? Make the student stand ot? Be too tritrustve?Ronde sufficient opportunities for the student to practice/learn her objectives kr the acuvity?Ito pracucal? Prenide sufficient opportunities for the student to perucipete in the acovity withfellow stutienta?WIII fellow etwleate be lavelved La leateleswattas the adaptattetas/chwogeel.
47
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
![Page 56: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
1?1 How cai the matrix be translated into a student schedule?
The team can develop the student's schedule by listing in three columns: 1) eachactivity and the time and day(s), 2) the person responsible for each activity. and 3)the fundamental values and priority skill areas which will be addressed during eachactivity. Be sure to include school supported home/family activities on thestudent's schedule. As the school year progresses, the student's schedule should beupdated to reflect changes in activities, location of activities, persons responsible,and outcomes addressed. An accumulation of student schedules as the studentprogresses through school will provide a record of skills taught within specificactivities and settings.
(Task 4 Determine Support Tasks
EiHow can the team manage the accomplishment of tasksnecessary to support the student's program?
The Support Task Planning Sheet depicted in Figure 13 may be used to list aridmonitor the accomplishment of tasks which support the achievement of a student'sgoals. These tasks are goals for teachers, administrators, parents, and other stu-dents. The tasks can include acthrities such as assisting the student's family toobtain community services, obtaining a consult from a physical therapist, develop-ing transition plans, developing a peer buddy system, or establishing a circle offriends. The planning sheet provides space for listing tasks, the person(s) respon-sible, target dates for initiating and completing the task, and space for comments.
[rTask 5 Monitor Progress and Evaluate the Availability of BestPractices to the Student's Program
IR1 How can the team summarize and monitor the implementation ofthe student's program within specific classes and activities?
The Class/Activity Summary Form (Figure 11) can be used by the team to keeptrack of specific general education outcomes and priority skills which are to betaught through each general education class or activity that the student participatesin during the school day. A copy of the form is given to the responsible teacher foreach activity or class to keep-track of which skills are actually addressed during theschool week. By adding a scoring system (e.g., E = excellent. S = satisfactory, U =unsatisfactory) the team can also use this form to periodically monitor student
4856
![Page 57: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
1?1
progress and to pinpoint potential problem areas that the team will need to address.After gathering information from each class or activity, the team can summarizeoverall progress on the Priority Skill Areas Program Summary Form (Figure 14).
How can the team summarize and monitor progress on priorityskill areas that were selectedlor instruction?
11
After completing the matrix and the Class/Activity Summary Form for each classor activity, the team may list all the unique priority skill areas and specific skills to
be taught on the PrioritySkill Areas - Program Sum-mary form (Figure 14). Thisform is important in that itallows the team to summa-rize progress on skillsacross all activities. Quar-terly progress on the prior-ity skill areas and theirassociated skills and rou-tines can be summarizedusing the scoring systemdepicted on the form or'another system selected bythe team.
Figure 14Priority Skill Areas - Program Summary
Student Name:
Date initiated:
IFirst.guartarSecond uarter S
Selected Skills Areas and Skills
.
;Third OnarterSunsmartE.
111, 111
Part IC1701101L
il TurnAsks Oyestums
Answers Quest:ons
;C CiP P
riP A
lielps Others C :p A
..
11111111
COMMENISbewessary Key:
A . AccomplishedP Making ProgresoC Little Progress. but
will Centinue ProgramD Dropped
1?1How can the team insure that each team member knows theirresponsibilities for each of the student's major instructionalactivities?
The Activity / Class Management Plan (Figure 15) can be used to delineate spe-cific responsibilities of team members for each of the student's major instructionalactivities. For each activity the team specifies the instructor for the activity, needfor additional adults during the activity and the person(s; responsible for designingthe instructional progi am. integrating the student's program into on-goingclassroom or community activities, providing training and follow-up to direct in-structional staff, and for individualizing the student's materials. The plan alsospecifies how often consultation and follow-up will be provided for the particularclass or activity. The team must decide which activities from the student's schedulerequire a management plan.
When should the team complete Parts II and III of the BestPractice Indicator Checklist?
Part I of the Best Practice Checklist for Individual Students (Figure 8) was com-pleted prior to implementing the student's plan. In Part I, the team identified whichbest practices were most important to the student and family. Parts II and IIIshould be completed after the student's program has been implemented. The teamcompletes Parts II and III by indicating which identified practices could not beincorporated into the student's program (Part II) and making recommendations
49
57
![Page 58: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
rACTIVrrY/CLASS MANAGEMENT PLAN )
(Part III) for increasing the availabilityof those practices within the school/community. This information shouldbe given to the School Planning Teamfor their use in planning for theimprovement of best practices withinthe school.
T'tgure 15
Activity/Class
Number of Students Location of Activity
Instructor
Additional Adults are Required During the AcUvity/Class to:
Provide Instruction to the studmtProvide instruction to other students 0Manage the student's Fi iyeltal needs 0Implement behavior management a:ate/am 0Implement song Integration tarategies 0Provide assistance during transitions 0Train and monitor peer taw/buddies 0Other
If a teaching assistant or volunteer is available, who is responsible for the dailysupervision?
Who is responsible for desigAing the student's instructional programs?
Who is responsible for interfacing the student's program with ongoingactivities?
How often will instrueUonal data be collected?
Who is responsible for providing training and follow-up to direct instructional staff?
How often will training/follow-up occur?
Whcn will training/follow-up occur?
If individualized instructional materials art neoessary, who will develop the student's, materials?
(Task 6 Transition to Next Grade
INWhen should the team begin the transition process to the nextgrade?
The Individual Student Planning Team Process should be repeated yearly to aidthe student in transition from grade to grade. The team should begin planning thestudent's transition to the next grade in the spring (e.g.. March or April) of the yearprior to the transition. Acting as a transition team, the team that currently sup-ports the student remains the same but adds teachers from the next grade or newschool for planning next year's program. For example. if the student were currentlyin fourth grade, her team might consist of herself, her fourth grade teacher, par-ents, special education teacher, principal, and a student peer. In March, one ormore fifth grade teachers would be added to the team to determine fifth gradeassignment and to develop the student's program within fifth grade settings. In thefall, the student would transition to fifth grade, her fifth grade teacher would remainon the team and her fourth grade teacher would drop off of the team. The nextMarch, sixth grade teachers would be added to the team, and so on.
UHow does the team develop the plan for the following year andstill support the studentduring the current year?
Typically, the student planning team will designate some meetings in the springI for developing the student's program for the following year and some meetings to
50
58
![Page 59: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
continue to support the student in her current placement. For example, the teammay continue to meet weekly, but designate every third meeting to developing thestudent's program for the next year. As the end of the current year draws near.more time might be allocated to transition meetings if the plan is not complete. Thegoal would be that the student's program would be completely developed and readyto start by the first day of school in the fall.
References
Giangreco, M.. Cloninger. C., Mueller. P., Yuan. S. & Ashworth. S. (1991). Perspectives ofparents whose children have sensory impairments. Journal of the Association for Personswith Severe Handicaps, 11(1), 14-21.
Fox, T., Williams. W., Mon ley, M.K., McDermott, A. & Fox. W. (1989). Guidelines andprocedures training manual. Manual III of the Individual Program Design Series. Unpub-lished manuscript, Center for Developmental Disabilities. University of Vermont.
Williams. W.. Fox. T.. Mon ley, M.K.. McDermott. A. & Fox. W. (1989). Student RecordManual I of the Individual Program Design Series. Unpublished manuscript. Center forDevelopmental Disabilities. University of Vermont.
Williams. W., Fox, T., Hall. S. & Fox, W. (1989). Outcomes and routines - Manual II of theIndividual Program Design Series. Unpublished manuscript. Center for DevelopmentalDisabilities. University of Vermont.
Williams, W., Fox. T. & Fox. W. (1989). Curriculum approaches, assessment proceduresand outcome selection Manual IV of the Individual Program Design Series. Unpublishedmanuscript, Center for Developmental Disabilities, University of Vermont.
51
![Page 60: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
Summary ChartForms for Completing Each Task in the
Individual Student Planning Team Process
1 Establish The Planning Team
Team Management PlanTeam Meeting WorksheetTeam Goals WorksheetTeam Member ChecklistAdapting the Student Planning Process
Identify Fundamental Values, TheStudent's Strengths, Best PracticeNeeds and Skills to be TaughtFundamental Values WorksheetSkills Areas to be Taught WorksheetBest Practice Checklist for Individual StudentsStudent Assessment Worksheet
41111.101111M
3 Complete the Activity MatrixActivities MatrixActivity Selection WorksheetClass/Activity Summary FormActivity Compatibility Plan
4 Determine Support TasksSupport Task Planning Sheet
Monitor Progress and Evaluatethe Availability of Best Practicesto the Student's ProgramClass/Activity Summary FormPriority Skill Areas - Program SummaryActivity/Class Management Plan
Transition to Next Grade
All of the ab-ove forms
-
52
G
![Page 61: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
1?1
1?1
What is a collaborative team?
A collaborative team is a group of individuals who share common beliefs and worktowards common goals. Collabarative teams sit in a circle to encourage face to faceinteraction. Collaborative tea-ns are made up of persons with varying areas of exper-tise who share group tasks. responsibilities and group leadership. Collaborativeteam members use collaborative skills. Team members encourage each other tointeract and to take part in problem solving and decision making, make decisions byconsensus, poll each other for understanding of issues or ideas, and criticize ideasbut do not criticize each other. Collaborative teams set rules for dealing with sensi-tive or controversial issues. Collaborative team members observe each other and giveeach other constructive feedback on how they are doing as a team. Collaborativeteams continue to change and grow as problems are addressed and solved. Collabo-rative teams have fun!
What are collaborative skills?
Collaborative skills are social skills which help people work cooperatively andproductively together. One of the most important functions of the team is to usecollaborative skills to create an atmosphere conducive to building trust, solvingproblems and resolving conflicts.
How do team members build trust in each other?
For a team to really become effective, trust must be developed among team mem-bers. Initially, most teams will experience a lack of trust. Parents may fee: uncom-fortable saying what they really feel in front of five or six professionals they do notknow. Teachers may feel uncomfortable admitting that they do not know the answerto a problem or that they need help in front of the parent, or the student, or theschool principal. The classroom teacher and parent may not trust that the adminis-tration will follow though on promises. Collaborative teams develop trust over timethrough team members demonstrating that trust is warranted.
The first step to building trust is for each team member to act trustworthy. Be ontime to meetings, don't discuss team issues with others outside of team meetings.don't talk behind other peoples back, and complete assigned tasks on time. Ideas forbuilding trust include:
Treat team members with respect.
* Listen to others (e.g., maintain eye contact with the speaker. give nonverbal signsof acceptance and encouragement, probe for more information by asking ques-tions. paraphrase or summarize what the speaker said to check for understand-ing).
Tell other team members something personal about yourself.
Be willing to discuss your feelings openly and honestly.
53
0 1
![Page 62: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
1?1
* Offer support and assistance to others (outside of your job responsibilities).
Distribute team roles and responsibilities among all team members- parents and students can facilitate the group too!
* Share the blame if team decisions go wrong or if plans are ineffective.
* Share the recognition and rewards if team decisions are right or plans workwell.
* Decide on issues by building consensus rather than by administrative decisionor voting.
Encourage all team members to take part in planning and decision making.
* Respect each others ideas.
* Be critical of idea's and not people.
During conflicts practice taking the other person's perspective.
* Establish team goals and the purpose of the team.
* Have fun together!
How do collaborative teams make decisions?
Collaborative teams make decisions by consensus. That means that every memberof the team agrees to the decision. There is no voting or majority rules standard oncollaborative teams. Were teams to vote on a decision, some team members wouldwin while other members would lose, violating the very nature of collaboration.Coming to consensus on tough issues is not an easy task, hut it is a necessary task.Knowing that consensus must be reached forces teams to become more creative andopen to ideas when differences of opinion are voiced. Coming to consensus takesmore time, hut a decision that everyone agrees to is a decision that will beimplemented.
How do collaborative teams solve problems?
There are many problem solving models from which teams can choose. Many teamschoose to select a formal model for solving problems since these models typicallyprovide a good structure for solving problems and help team members generatemany possible solutions to the problem. Typical problem solving steps include:
1. recognize that there is a problem.2. define the problem.3. think of many solutions,4. decide what to do,5. try a solution, and6. evaluate the results.
Once the problem has been defined, a critical step is to think of many, manypossible solutions. Often the first solutions generated for problems are the mostobvious and least likely to wail. The twentieth possible solution may be the mostcreative and have the greatest potential for success. A process called "brainstorm-ing" has been used by many teams to generate ideas.
54
6°4
![Page 63: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
1 ?I
What is brainstorming?
In brainstorming, team members are given 2 or 3 minutes of individual thinktime. During think time each team iimiliber writes on a piece of scratch paper all ofthe ideas they can think of. Next each member provides one of their ideas per turnin a round robin format (e.g.. moving clockwise around the table). The recorderwrites the idea on a flip chart or blackboard so everyone can see each idea as it iswritten. The round robin continues until everyone has all of their ideas written onthe chart. During round robin team members are encouraged to be creative andoffer "far out" ideas. Other team members are not allowed to make comments orjudgements about the ideas presented. There is no discussion or even rewording ofideas. Ideas are simply stated and written. When all ideas are exhausted the teamtakes 2 or 3 minutes of quiet wait time to see if any more ideas pop into someone'shead. Typically during this time several new ideas are generated. Next, teammembers are free to discuss ideas, reword and combine ideas, eliminate ideas orcreate new ideas. After discussion the team selects the best ideas for action.
How do we deal with controversial issues?
Collaborative teams are designed to deal with controversy. Collaborative teamsare not competitive in nature. There are no winners or losers on a collaborativeteam. Decisions are made by consensus. Everyone must agree in order for theteam to continue to work. The cooperative philosophy of collaborative teams re-quires that teams come up with creative, productive and successful solutions toproblems. This is not to say that there will not be times when team members are atodds around a given issue. Team meetings can become very uncomfortable andrelationships can be hurt if controversy is not handled openly and honestly. Eachcollaborative team must set croup norms for dealing with controversy and shouldfollow steps for resolving conflicts as the need arises. Sample norms include:
* The context for controversy should be cooperative.
* The emphasis should not be on who has the best answer, but to make the bestgroup decision.
Every team member should take an active part in group decisions. Ideas shouldbe expressed openly and honestly without defensiveness.
Every contribution should be valued, respected and taken seriously.
Emphasis should be on viewing the issue under discussion from a variety ofperspectives.
Group members should be critical of ideas, not people. "I appreciate you, I aminterested in your ideas, but I disagree with your current position" should becommunicated.
Members should not take personally other members disagreements with andrejection of ideas.
Members should encourage each other to express emotions during debate.
The group should help all members, regardless of status, to speak out confidently.Avoid saying what you think your boss wants to hear!
56 3
![Page 64: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
What are the steps in negotiating resolutions to conflicts?
Steps in Conflict Resolution (from Johnson and Johnson. 1987) include:
1. Confront the opposition - express your view of the conflict and your feelingsabout it and at the same time invite the opposition to do the same. Don't hitand run. Confront only when there is time to jointly define the conflict andschedule a negotiating session.
2. Jointly define the conflict - define a conflict as a mutual problem to be solved.not a win-lose. struggle. Do not label, accuse or insult the opposition.
3. Communicate positions and feelings throughout negotiations.
4. Take the opponent's perspective - try to understand your opponent's position.
5. Coordinate motivation to negotiate in good faith - there are costs and gainsfor each party in resolving the conflict. To increase the motivation of anothergroup member to negotiate, you need to increase his costs for continuing theconflict and reduce his gains. To decrease another person's motivation tonegotiate, decrease his costs and increase the gains for continuing the conflict.
6. Reach an agreement - all participants need to be satisfied with the agreementand committed to abiding by it. The agreement should specify the joint positionon the issues being adopted. It should also include provisions for future meet-ings to check how well the agreement is working and how cooperation can beimproved.
Is it important for team members to state team goals andindividual goals?
Yes! The team must establish common goals among all team members. Bystating the goals of the group, each team member can clearly understand the pur-pose of the team (Why are we here?). Goals are also very important because theygive the team direction in decision making. For instance, if a stated goal is tosupport the student in her third grade classroom, the team might decide to addresources to the classroom during reading activities rather than to remove the childto the resource room. Some common team goals for Individual Student PlanningTeams are:
Develop a feeling of shared ownership among school staff and parents.
Provide support to the student's teachers.
Provide support to the student and his/her peers.
Develop family support. communication and involvement.
Problem solve specific learning or behavior issues for the student.
* Identify and access necessary school and community resources.
Develop long range educational plans for the student.
* Develop transition plans for movement to the next grade or school or to adultservices.
56
64
![Page 65: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
I?1
I Develop, implement and evaluate specific instructional programs.
* Develop an integrated schedule of activities for the student.
* Identify staff/parent information and-training needs.
* Improve best practices for the student and his/her classmates.
School Planning Team goals might include some of the following:
Improve best practices for all students who attend the school.
* Identify resources that the school can access to provide necessary services tostudents and their families.
* Develop a school mission statement.
* Redesign the school's service delivery model to include the delivery of specialeducation and Chapter I services within regular classes.
* Improve school and community relationships.
Develop community support for school programs.
Individual team member goals are also very important. Each member shouldstate one or more personal goals they would like to meet by being a member of theteam. As team members share their personal goals with each other. the teamshould make a commitment to try to help each member attain his or her goals.Sample individual team member goals include:
* Become more assertive at team meetings.
Share my feelings as well as my ideas.
Brinf; a positive attitude into each meeting.
Really listen to what other people have to share.
Take risks with the team (say what I feel and not what I think people want tohear).
* Develop a friendship with one other person on the team.
* Speak in plain language: no jargon words.
* Volunteer mom. often.
Do collaborative teams ever have fun'?
Absolutely! Collaborative teams realize that there are two sides to every meet-ing. Team meetings should be task oriented. Agendas should be set and movedthrough within time limits. Issues, including those ',which develop conflict betweengroup members must be dealt with. However, successful teams are alsorelationship oriented. Teams are made up of people and people need some time torelax and have fun. Many teams set aside specific time at the beginning of eachmeeting to celebrate accomplishments. What are we doing really well? What things
57
65
![Page 66: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
?
did Billy do this week that were wonderful? This not only allows team members topat each other on the back, it reaffirms that the team is "working" and sets a posi-tive tone for the remainder of the meeting.
Many teams meet over food. Some type of refreshment (e.g., cookies, candy,fruit, juice, coffee) sets a tone cf friendliness and relaxation. As people share foodthey are also sharing feelings, ideas, responsibilities and work loads. Some teamsplan for pot luck lunches or dinners severat times a year just to celebrate or toshare some social time together (no work during this time please). Team membersshould spend some time discussing the ways that they would like to make meetingsmore fun. The goal should be that team members look forward to team meetings.not dread them.
Who should be on a collaborative team?
The membership of a collaborative team depends upon the purpose and goals ofthe team. In this manual we are concerned with two types of teams. School Plan-ning Teams and Individual Student Planning Teams. The purpose of the SchoolPlanning Team is to improve education for all students who attend the school. Toaccomplish this goal, persons who are representative of the school and communityshould be on the team (e.g.. school administrators, teachers, other school staff,students, families, school board members and other interested community mem-bers). Individual Student Planning Teams are formed to provide support to studentswith intensive needs, their teachers and families. Team membership should consistof the student, people most involved with the student on a day to day basis (e.g.,parents, teachers, the principal), and other persons depending on the particularneeds of the student or family (e.g., physical therapist. guidance counselor, employ-ment specialist).
U When and how often should School Planning Teams andIndividual Student Planning Teams meet?
School Planning Teams decide for themselves how often they need to meet toaccomplish the tasks of reviewing best practices, prioritizing best practices forimprovement, developing action plans, and monitoring progress on plans. Asdescribed in Chapter 3, Task 3 of the School Planning Process involves the teamcompleting the School Planning Process Worksheet. The worksheet provides avehicle for the team to identify the tasks to be completed by the team and to settask completion timelines and meeting dates. School Planning Teams generally meeton a monthly or bimonthly basis for about two hours. Individual Student PlanningTeams also decide for themselves how often they need to meet to accomplish theirtasks. They generally meet on a weekly or biweekly basis with the meetings beingthree quarters to one hour in duration.
laHow large should teams be?
The optimal size of a collaborative team is about 5 or 6 persons. With a smallgroup each individual team member has more opportunities to speak and take partin problem solving and decision making. However, in actual situations teams tendto be larger than the optimal number. School Planning Teams, for example, havehad anywhere from 10 to 16 team members. Middle school or high school Individual Student Planning Teams also tend to be larger due to the number of generalclass teachers a student has (cg.. 6 general educators + the principal, student,parents, special educator, guidance counselor = 12 team members).
58
6
![Page 67: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
1?1Our Individual Student Planning Team has 12 members, how canwe be a collaborative team?
It is extremely difficult to involve everyone from a large team in problem-solvingand decision-making activities during a 3/4 to 1 hour long weekly meeting. Theconcepts of core team and extended team have been developed to help teams withnumerous members to be more efficient.
The core team is a small group of people who are the most involved with thestudent on a day to day basis (e.g.. student. parents. 1 or 2 regular educators. 1special educator. 1 speech pathologist). The core team generally meets weekly to dothe majority of the planning for the student. Extended team members are peopleinvolved with the student who do not need to meet weekly as a team but need tomeet on a regular basis to discuss issues and to provide support for each other.Generally extended teams meet on a monthly or bimonthly basis and individualteam members meet in between regularly scheduled extended team meetings.
The use of meeting agendas and backup informational systems are very impor-tant for facilitating communica-tion among core and extendedteam members. At the end ofeach meeting the team shouldestablish an agenda for the nextmeeting and determine whichextended team members need tobe present. In this way, ex-tended team members can.beinvited to join in on discussionand problem solving aroundissues that affect them or inwhich they have particularexpertise. Extended teammembers can also place itemson the agenda and in this wayrequest to be present at a teammeeting to have the team dealwith an issue or problem thatthey have identified.
The team needs to develop abackup information system sothat extended team memberscan be kept informed about theissues the team is addressingand team decisions. Thebackup information systemcould be as simple as providingextended team members with acopy of meeting minutes andagendas. A more comprehensivesystem could provide minutesand identify core team membersto discuss the minutes with andto get feedback from the ex-tended team member to takeback to the next core teammeeting. The Team ManagemeruPlan (Figure 1) can be used to
Figure 1
Team Management Plan-
Student Year
Core Planning Team Members Position
Extended Planning Team Members Position Info. Backup
_When will thc the Team meet dunng thc school year.'
Care Team: Extmded Team:Day of Week Day ot WeekThne TimeWeekly 3 Weekly 3Every Other Week 1 Every Other Week 3Other Monthly 3
Other
If additional meetings (core or extended) arc needed who mil bc responsible for ar-ranging them?
If the student or his/her parents cannot attend meetings. how will the team keepthem informed and solicit their input?
Who zs the primary parent contact person?
It a teaching assistant is assigned. who is primarily responsible fur supervising theassistant?
Who is pnmarily responsible for monitormg the student's:
physical management needs?behavior management strategies?social integration strategies?transitions between activities/classes'?
59
6 7
![Page 68: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
identify core and extended team membership and to define how team members willwork together.
The Team Management Plan provides a vehicle for the team to address severalother issues. The identification of a primary parent contact person is essential. Ittakes time for members of collaborative teams to become comfortable with eachother and the teaming process. It is very important that the student's parents feelthat there is at least one person on the team that they can talk to freely and com-fortably until they become comfortable with the entire team. The plan also allowsthe team to identify the person who is primarily responsible for various componentsof the student's program and the instructional assistant (if there is one). In thisway, if team members have problems between meetings they know whom to contactfor assistance.
How can we keep our Student Planning Team meetings under anhour and still get anything accomplished?
Individual Student Planning Teams generally meet for one hour or less. Someteams meet for as little as 30 minutes. In order to use this small amount of timeeffectively many teams use variations of the Team Meeting Worksheet along withteam member roles to keep thc meetings moving and to improve collaboration.Typical team roles include facilitator, timekeeper and recorder. Many teams haveidentified additional team member roles to help their teams work better together.Some of the other roles teams use include encourager, jargon buster, and observer.
All team members must share in and take responsibility for the work andleadership of the team. It is very important to rotate team member roles on aregular basis to give all team members a chance to share leadership of and respon-sibility for the team. A listing of potential team member roles is presented below. Itshould be noted that, although individuals are assigned specific roles, all teammembers are responsible for the smooth running of the team. Any team membercan help facilitate the agenda, remind the group that time is running out, or en-courage silent members to contribute to the conversation.
Selected Team Member Roles
Facilitator. The facilitator helps the team to set the agenda and to move smoothlythrough each agenda item. She insures that the team remains task oriented andworks to promote the team goals. The facilitator seeks information and opinions,asks for facts and feelings from each team member, pulls together major ideas andsuggestions and restates and summarizes major points. The facilitator also helps tosolve interpersonal problems between group members by promoting open discus-sions in order to resolve conflicts and increase group togetherness.
Recorder. The recorder writes down agenda items and all agreed-upon outcomes ofthe meeting. The recorder should check to insure that there is consensus amongteam members before recording outcomes. The reporter asks for clarifications andsummarizes group discussions in order to accurately produce meeting minutes.
Timekeeper. At the beginning of the meeting the team should establish the agendaand set a time limit for each agenda item. The timekeeper keeps track of the timespent on each of the teams agenda items. She signals the group shortly before timeis up on each item, and when it is time to shift from discussion of agenda items tothe assignment of individual and group tasks and the building of the agenda for thenext meeting.
Encourager. The encourager warmly encourages everyone to participate, givingrecognition for contributions, demonstrating acceptance and openness to the ideas
6068
;
![Page 69: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
of others. The encourager is friendlyand responsive to team members.
Jargon Buster. The jargon busterreminds team members when theyiire using words that are not com-monly understood by everyone.This is often a fun job. Some teamsgive the jargon buster a'noise makerwhich she blows whenever a jargonterm is used.
Observer. The observer observesthe team in action and gives feed-back to team members on how wellthey did in their assigned roles andon good teaming behavior. Theobserver should use a feedbackform, such as the one in Figure 2. tostructure the observations. To usethe form the team identifies skills onwhich they want feedback (e.g..active listening, summarizing andparaphrasing. e. -ouraging others toparticipate). Th, names of teaminerr`,ers are listed across the top ofthe form. Skills are listed down theleft side of the form. The observer
Figure 2
Team Member Observation Sheet
Collaborative Skill
Team Members
6,4
Encourages Others
Asks for Clanfication
'EA-presses :Feelings
EA-presses Ideas ill
Figure 3
Team Meeting Worksheet_ .
Student
Team Members Present:
Date
Team Members Absent: Informatirm Backup
^
Roles: For This Meeting: For Next Meeting:FacilitatorRecorder
uneaeepertncourager
A4gende for this meeting: Time LimitI' Celebrate 3 Mins.
1.
3.
Agenda for the Next Meeting: Next Meeting Date1.
2.
61
makes a tally mark each time a teammember demonstrates a skill and at theend of the meeting reports the fre-quency of use of each skill. Individualteam members can also identify skillsthat they would like to improve duringmeetings. For example. if one teammember is having problems interrupt-ing others during group discussions,he might ask the observer to count thenumber of times that he interruptsothers.
Collaborative teams have used theTeam Meeting Worksheet (Figure 3) asan effective tool for increasing teamproductivity. The Team MeetingWorksheet provides the team with aformat for keeping track of who is ateach meeting and who is absent.Information backups are also identi-fied for each absent member to makesure that they are kept up to date onteam activities and decisions. Theworksheet is also used to identifyteam member roles,for this meetingand for the next meeting.
The next section of the worksheetis the agenda for this meeting. Items
63
![Page 70: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
1?1
identified at the last meeting can be listed here along with additional agenda itemsidentified by team members between meetings or at the current meeting. At thebeginning of the meeting the team assigns each agenda item a time limit. The timelimit is an estimate of the amount of time it will take to cover the item. Once allitems have been assigned time limits, they are prioritized in the order they will beaddressed during the meeting. Those items not addressed by the end of the meet-ing can be added to the next meeting agenda.
In the example in Figure 3 one agenda item (celebrate) has been listed. Manyteams have routinely added this item to each agenda to insure that there is time forteam members to talk about the good things that are resulting from the team'swork. "Celebrate" as the first agenda item also sets a positive tone for each meeting.Following the agenda is a space for the recorder to keep minutes of the teamsdiscussions and decisions. Finally, there is space to assign tasks to team membersto be completed outside of team meetings. For example. a task might be to identifya peer for the student to tutor. The regular education teacher and the guidancecounselor might be responsible for accomplishing the task by the next meeting.
Our School Planning Team has 22 members, how can we be acollaborative team?
School Planning Team meetings generally last about two hours. This gives teamsmore time to do some "creative" teaming which allows them to partially overcomethe problems associated with large team membership. Most of the collaborativeteaming strategies used by individual student planning teams will work with schoolplanning teams (e.g.. assigning roles, using Team Meeting Worksheets, developingbackup information systems, using agendas). However, different strategies areneeded for breaking the team into smaller groups and developing a team manage-ment plan.
It is not appropriate to limit the size of the School Planning Team. The school isa community venture and must be open to all who wish to be involved. However,the large team can be broken into smaller teams of 5 or 6 persons to discuss anissue, to brainstorm ideas, to develop a product, or to complete a specific task. Atthe end of the small group work, one person in each group may then report back tothe entire team. Once all of the small groups have reported, the larger team canthen incorporate the work of each small group into a single large group product ordecision.
How are we doing?
There are many ways that teams can determine whether or not they are doing agood job of being a team. As mentioned earlier, having a good system of observingand giving each other feedback is an excellent way for teams to self-monitor. How-ever, some team members may feel uncomfortable being observed, observing others,and giving and receiving feedback. These are skills that need to be learned. If yourteam has access to someone that has experience in collaborative teaming and indoing observations and giving feedback, they should be used to teach your teamthese skills.
Teams that do not feel comfortable with observations can still self-monitor theirteam behavior by using a team member checklist that each person completesindividually. There are many such checklists available. A sample checklist isdepicted in Figure 4. Each team should spend a little time selecting, revising ordeveloping their own checklist. After team members have individually completedthe checklist, the team should-spend time discussing how individual members andthe team as a whole is functioning. Regardless of which process the team selects tomonitor its teaming behaviors, the team should periodically process how they are
62
![Page 71: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
doing. This simply means that the team should take some time to discuss how eachmember is feeling about being a member of the team. What is working well and
what isn't? What can be done to make eachother feel more comfortable? Some teamsprocess at the end of each meeting while othersset -aside time only when problems betweenteam members arise. How and how often yourteam self assesses and processes is one of manydecisions your team will need to make.
Figure 4
r Team Member Checklist
Nemo Date
0 I contributed my ideas.
0 I encourage others to contribute their ideas.
listened to and crpressed suppor: and acceptance ofother's ideas.
0 I evassed futings.
0 I offered my persorwl and professional resources tosupport the team
0 I asked for darcation and help awn neede.d.
0 I helped the group keep wotAttg.
0 I maintained a sense of humor.
0 I recorded group and individual tasks.
0 I enjoyed myself
My Personal Goals
00
End NoteThis chapter is based upon information found in the following publications:
Glickman. C.D. (1990). Supervision of instruction: A developmental approach. (2nd ed.) Boston:Allyn and Bacon.
Hazel, J.S., Schumaker, J.B., Sherman, J.A. & Sheldon-Wildgen, J. (1981). ASSET: ii_social skillsprogram for adolescence. Champlain, Il: Research Press.
Johnson. D. & Johnson, F. (1987). Joining Together: Group therapy and group skills.Englewood. Cliffs. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall.
Stainback. W. & Stainback. S. (1990). Support networks for inclusive schooling: Integratedinterdependent education. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes Publishing.
Thousand, J. & Villa, R. (in press). Collaborative teams: A powerful tool for school restructuring.In R. Villa. J. Thousand, W. Stainback and S. Stainback (Eds.) Restructuring for heterogeneity:
ini v h.n n v I la 'V' '. Baltimore:Paul H. Brooks Publishing.
Thousand, J., Fox, T., Reid, R.. Godek. J., Williams, W. & Fox, W. (1986). The Homecoming11 n wh. r- -n in iv- u h 1 wi hin r ul 1
room environments. Burlington, Vermont. Center for Developmental Disabiltities. University ofVermont.
63
71
![Page 72: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
Appendix A
Forms for Completing the
Schoolwide PlanningTeam Process
![Page 73: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
School
(-school Planning Team Management Plan )Year
School Planning Team Members (name/address/phone number)Administrators:
School Board Members:
School Staff:
Students:
Parents:
Other Community Members:
When and where will the School Phinning Team meet?
Day of WeekTime: from toLocation
Will Team members require child care in order to attend meetings? Yes 0 No 0If yes, how will the issue of childcare be addressed by the team?
How will the Team keep others informed and solicit input throughout theplanning process?School StaffStudentsParentsCommunity MembersSchool Board
T"
![Page 74: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
( School Planning Team Meeting Worksheet )School Date
Team Members Present
Team Members Absent Information Backup
Roles For This Meeting For Next MeetingFacilitatorRecorderTimekeeperEncourager
Agenda for This Meeting Time Limit1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Agenda for the Next Meeting Next Meeting Date1.
2.
3.
![Page 75: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
Minutes TaskPerson(s)
ResponsibleCompletedBy (Date)
7 5
![Page 76: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
A
Team Date
Team Goals
Why are we meeting? (What do we hope to accomplish as a team?'What is the focus of our planning?
My Individual Goals
Why am I a member of this team? What do I hope to accomplish as a team member? Sow can Iimprvve myself through this eAperience? What ran I offer to the team?
76
![Page 77: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
Team Member Checklist
Name Date
0 I contributed my ideas.
0 I encouraged others to contribute their ideas.
0 I listened to and expressed support and acceptance ofother's ideas.
0 I evressed my feelings.
0 I offered my personal and professional resources tosupport the team.
0 I asked for clarification and help when needed.
0 I helped the group keep working.
0 I maintained a sense of humor.
0 I recorded group and individual- tasks.
0 I enjoyed myself.
My Personal Goals
7 7
![Page 78: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
Tailoring the School Planning Team Process - Tasks To Be CompletedSchool Dat
Task How will the taskbe addressed?
When?By whom?
Date of nextmeeting
Establish the School Planning Teamwhich represents all constituents ofthe school.
Review the most current BestPactice Guidelines.
, ,/
Tailor the School Planning Processto meet the needs of the school.
Gather and summarize information onthe level of agreement and need forimprovement of best practices fromschool administrators, staff, andstudents, parents. and communitymembers.
Incorporate information fromIndividual Student PlanningTeams into the selection process.
Select and prioritize best practicesto be improved.
78
![Page 79: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
T kas How will the taskbe addressed?
When?By whom?
Date of nextmeeting
Gain approval of selected bestpractices from school staff,administrators, students.parents and communitymembers prior to beginningthe next task.
Develop action plans.
Gain approval of action plansfrom school staff, administrators,students, parents and communitymembers prior to beginning thenext task.
Develop systems change,policy/procedure change andinservice training summaryworksheets.
Coordinate the implementationof action plans and worksheets.
Assess progress on action plansand select additional bestpractices for improvement. -
_.....
![Page 80: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
Best Practice Guidelines for Meeting the Needsof All Students in.Local Schools
Survey
Goals for educating all children in Vermont schools include:
Goal 1: Vermonters will see to it that every child becomes a competent, caring, productive,responsible individual and citizen who is committed to continued learning throughout life:
Goal 2: Vermonters will restructure their schools to support very high performance for allstudents;
Goal 3: Vermont will attract, support and develop the most effective teachers and school leadersin the nation: and
Goal 4: Vermont parents, educators, students and other citizens will create powerful partnershipsto support teaching and learning in every community (Vermont Department of Education,1990).
The best practices are intended to assist schools to meet Vermont's educational goals bydeveloping educational services which will prepare all students for adult life within their commu-nity. This survey is intended to allow you to express your opinions to help guide your school in thedevelopment and delivery of best practices to all students who attend your school. For each bestpractice you will be asked:
if you agree with the best practice(I Agree, I Disagree, or I'm Undecided);
the need for improving the best practice in your school(High Need, Medium Need, Low Need, Don't Know);
to check those best practices that you feel are a priority forimprovement in your school.
.1
Your thoughtful responses to each best practice will greatly assist your School PlanningTeam to identify the current strengths of your school program as well as needed improvements inspecific areas. You responses will help to provide for the continued development of quality educa-tion within your school.
This survey should take less than 30 minutes to complete. Thank you for your help.
![Page 81: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
8 1
Scho
olN
ame
Posi
tion/
Titl
eD
ate
Nee
d fo
r Im
prov
emen
tin
Our
Sch
ool
BE
ST P
RA
CT
ICE
GU
IDE
LIN
ES
FOR
ME
ET
ING
TH
E N
EE
DS
OF
AL
L S
TU
DE
NT
S IN
LO
CA
L S
CH
OO
LS
se if
aPr
iori
ty
SCH
OO
L C
LIM
AT
E A
ND
ST
RU
CT
UR
E
1.T
he s
choo
l's p
hilo
soph
y st
atem
ent a
nd o
bjec
tives
sho
uld
be d
evel
oped
by
adm
inis
trat
ors,
sta
ff,
stud
ents
, par
ents
, sch
ool b
oard
mem
bers
and
oth
er c
omm
unity
mem
bers
and
sho
uld
refl
ect t
he s
choo
l'sco
mm
itmen
t to
mee
ting
the
indi
vidu
al n
eeds
of
all s
tude
nts
in a
ge-a
ppro
pria
te in
tegr
ated
sch
ool a
ndco
mm
unity
set
tings
.I
Agr
eeI
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
prio
rity
Ci
2.T
he s
choo
l's c
limat
e sh
ould
be
esta
blis
hed
by a
dmin
istr
ator
s, s
taff
, stu
dent
s, p
aren
ts s
choo
l boa
rdH
igh
Med
ium
Low
Don
'tpr
iori
ty
mem
bers
and
oth
er c
omm
unity
mem
bers
and
sho
uld
prom
ote
resp
ect f
or in
divi
dual
dif
fere
nces
am
ong
stud
ents
, enc
oura
ge th
e de
velo
pmen
t of
posi
tive
self
-est
eem
, est
ablis
h hi
gh a
chie
vem
ent e
xpec
tatio
nsfo
r al
l stu
dent
s, a
nd e
ncou
rage
the
deve
lopm
ent o
f ca
ring
per
sona
l rel
atio
nshi
ps a
mon
g st
uden
ts a
ndst
aff.
Nee
dN
eed
Nee
dK
now
C3
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
Pm U
ndec
ided
3.T
he s
choo
l's c
ode
of c
ondu
ct f
or s
tude
nts
and
staf
f sh
ould
be
esta
blis
hed
by a
dmin
istr
ator
s, s
taff
,st
uden
ts, p
aren
ts, s
choo
l boa
rd m
embe
rs a
nd o
ther
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs a
nd s
houl
d em
phas
ize
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
prio
rity
CI
1R
ositi
ve b
ehav
ior,
be
appl
ied
in a
con
sist
ent,
fair
man
ner,
and
take
into
acc
ount
the
uniq
ue n
eeds
of
'in
divi
dual
stu
dent
s.I
Agr
eeI
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
4.T
he s
choo
l sho
uld
prov
ide
ampl
e op
port
uniti
es f
or s
tude
nts,
sta
ff, p
aren
ts, a
dmin
istr
ator
s, s
choo
l boa
rdH
igh
Med
ium
Low
Don
'tpr
iori
tym
embe
rs a
nd o
ther
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs to
be
reco
gniz
ed f
or th
eir
acco
mpl
ishm
ents
, inc
ludi
ng h
elpi
ngot
hers
.N
eed
Nee
dN
eed
Kno
w0
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
5.T
he g
ener
al r
oles
and
res
pons
ibili
ties
of a
ll sc
hool
sta
ff (
incl
udin
g co
ntra
cted
sta
ff s
uch
as a
nH
igh
Med
ium
Low
Don
'tpr
iori
tyoc
cupa
tiona
l the
rapi
st o
r ps
ycho
logi
st)
rela
tive
to p
rovi
ding
inst
ruct
ion
and
supp
ort t
o al
l stu
dent
ssh
ould
be
clea
rly
delin
eate
d by
adm
inis
trat
ors,
sta
ff, s
tude
nts,
par
ents
, sch
ool b
oard
mem
bers
and
oth
erco
mm
unity
mem
bers
.
Nee
dN
eed
Nee
dK
now
Ei
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
6.T
he s
choo
l's p
rofe
ssio
nal d
evel
opm
ent p
roce
ss s
houl
d be
dev
elop
ed b
y ad
min
istr
ator
s, s
taff
, stu
dent
s,pa
rent
s, s
choo
l boa
rd m
embe
rs a
nd o
ther
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs a
nd s
houl
d in
clud
e in
serv
ice
trai
ning
,re
gula
rly
sche
dule
d ob
serv
atio
ns w
ith f
eedb
ack,
tech
nica
l ass
ista
nce,
pee
r co
achi
ng, a
nd m
ento
ring
.
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
prio
rity
CI
I A
gree
! D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
7.T
he s
choo
l's in
stru
ctio
nal s
uppo
rt s
yste
m (
e.g.
, cla
ssro
om-b
ased
mod
el f
or d
eliv
erin
g su
ppor
t ser
vice
s,te
ache
r as
sist
ance
team
, ind
ivid
ual s
tude
nt p
lann
ing
team
s, s
peci
al e
duca
tion
pre-
refe
rral
pro
cess
,vo
lunt
eer
syst
em)
shou
ld b
e de
velo
ped
by a
dmin
istr
ator
s, s
taff
, stu
dent
s, p
aren
ts, s
choo
l boa
rdm
embe
rs a
nd o
ther
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs a
nd s
houl
d be
ava
ilabl
e to
all
stud
ents
and
sta
ff.
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
prio
rity
ri
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
![Page 82: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
BE
E I
r R
AC
TIC
E G
UID
EL
INE
S FO
R M
EE
TIN
G T
HE
NE
ED
S O
F A
LL
ST
UD
EN
TS
IN L
OC
AL
SC
HO
OL
SN
eed
for
Impr
ovem
ent
in O
ur S
choo
lst
if a
Prio
rity
CO
LL
AB
OR
AT
IVE
PL
AN
NIN
G
8.T
he s
choo
l sho
uld
prov
ide
oppo
rtun
ities
for
sch
ool s
taff
, stu
dent
s, f
amily
mem
bers
, and
com
mun
itym
embe
rs to
bec
ome
prof
icie
nt a
t fun
ctio
ning
in a
col
labo
rativ
e m
anne
r (i
.e.,
shar
e re
spon
sibi
lity
and
reso
urce
s, m
ake
deci
sion
s by
con
sens
us, u
se a
str
uctu
red
mee
ting
agen
da f
orm
at, r
otat
e te
am r
oles
of
faci
litat
or, t
imek
eepe
r an
d re
cord
er).
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
prio
rity
0
9.T
he s
choo
l sho
uld
prov
ide
time
duri
ng s
choo
l hou
rs f
or in
stru
ctio
nal s
uppo
rt te
ams
(e.g
., in
divi
dual
stud
ent p
lann
ing
team
s, te
ache
r as
sist
ance
team
s, te
achi
ng te
ams)
to m
eet a
nd f
or in
divi
dual
team
mem
bers
to m
onito
r se
rvic
es, a
nd to
pro
vide
tim
ely
cons
ulta
tion,
sup
port
and
tech
nica
l ass
ista
nce
tofa
mili
es a
nd s
taff
.I
Agr
eeI
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Low
Nee
dN
eed
.
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
10.
For
stud
ents
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in b
asic
ski
ll an
d/or
soc
ial s
kill
area
s or
who
are
cha
lleng
ed b
y th
eir
gift
s an
d ta
lent
s, in
divi
dual
stu
dent
pla
nnin
g te
ams
shou
ld b
e co
nven
ed w
hich
are
res
pons
ible
for
the
deve
lopm
ent a
nd im
plem
enta
tion
of a
ll as
pect
s of
the
stud
ent's
edu
catio
nal p
rogr
am (
e.g.
, stu
dent
goa
ls,
stud
ent s
ched
ules
, pro
cedu
res
to a
ddre
ss le
arni
ng /
beha
vior
/ man
agem
ent i
ssue
s, tr
ansi
tion
plan
s,st
rate
gies
to s
uppo
rt th
e st
uden
t and
his
/her
teac
hers
and
fam
ily).
I.A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
I I.
Indi
vidu
al s
tude
nt p
lann
ing
team
s sh
ould
con
sist
of
the
stud
ent,
fam
ily m
embe
rs, t
he s
tude
nt's
gen
eral
clas
s te
ache
r(s)
and
oth
er a
ppro
pria
te p
erso
ns b
ased
upo
n th
e st
uden
t's n
eeds
(e.
g., p
rinc
ipal
, Cha
pter
Ite
ache
r, m
usic
teac
her,
phy
sica
l the
rapi
st, o
ne o
r tw
o of
the
stud
ent's
pee
rs, t
each
ing
assi
stan
t, sp
ecia
led
ucat
or, s
ocia
l wor
ker,
rep
rese
ntat
ives
of
com
mun
ity a
genc
ies,
fam
ily a
dvoc
ates
).I
Agr
eeI
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
1 2.
The
indi
vidu
al r
oles
of
each
stu
dent
pla
nnin
g te
am m
embe
r, in
clud
ing
rela
ted
serv
ice
prov
ider
s an
dot
her
cons
ulta
nts,
sho
uld
be s
peci
fied
by
the
team
and
sho
uld
be s
uppo
rtiv
e of
the
educ
atio
nal n
eeds
of
the
stud
ent.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
SOC
IAL
RE
SPO
NSI
BIL
ITY
13.
The
sch
ool s
houl
d fa
cilit
ate
the
deve
lopm
ent o
f so
cial
res
pons
ibili
ty a
nd s
elf-
relia
nce
by p
rom
otin
gst
uden
t par
ticip
atio
n in
vol
unte
er o
rgan
izat
ions
and
act
iviti
es (
e.g.
, com
mun
ity s
ervi
ce a
ctiv
ities
, pee
rtu
tori
ng/m
ento
ring
act
iviti
es, s
tude
nt g
over
nmen
t, pa
rtic
ipat
ion
in d
ecis
ion
mak
ing
abou
t im
port
ant
scho
ol o
r co
mm
unity
issu
es).
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
CI
Page
2
6384
![Page 83: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
BE
ST P
RA
CT
ICE
GU
IDE
LIN
ES
FOR
ME
ET
ING
TH
E N
EE
DS
OF
AL
L S
TU
DE
NT
S IN
LO
CA
L S
CH
OO
LS
Nee
d fo
r Im
prov
emen
tin
Our
Sch
ool
Pi f
rioi
rity
14.
The
sch
ool's
cur
ricu
lum
sho
uld
prov
ide
stru
ctur
ed o
ppor
tuni
ties
for
stud
ents
to le
arn
abou
t and
appr
ecia
te in
divi
dual
dif
fere
nces
am
ong
peop
le.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
prio
rity
0
15.
The
sch
ool's
cur
ricu
lum
sho
uld
prov
ide
stru
ctur
ed o
ppor
tuni
ties
for
stud
ents
to d
evel
op a
ppro
pria
teso
cial
ski
lls (
e.g.
, mak
ing
frie
nds,
coo
pera
ting
with
oth
ers,
sha
ring
, lis
teni
ng, a
void
ing
figh
ts)
whi
chin
clud
e fr
eque
nt p
ract
ice
duri
ng s
choo
l, ho
me
and
com
mun
ity a
ctiv
ities
.
I A
gree
I D
i,agr
eeI'm
Und
ecid
ed
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
CI
16.
The
sch
ool s
houl
d pr
ovid
e op
port
uniti
mff
or a
ll st
uden
ts to
par
ticip
ate
in a
ge-a
ppro
pria
te s
choo
lsp
onso
red
extr
a-cu
rric
ular
act
iviti
es (
e.g.
, fie
ld tr
ips,
spo
rts
team
s, c
lubs
, dan
ces,
ass
embl
ies,
stu
dent
gove
rnm
ent)
.I
Agr
eeI
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
prio
rity
0
17.
1
For
stud
ents
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in th
e so
cial
ski
ll ar
ea, a
pro
gram
for
incr
easi
ng s
ocia
l ski
lls s
houl
d be
deve
lope
d w
hich
incl
udes
: a)
asse
ssm
ent o
f cu
rren
t ski
lls in
iden
tifie
d ho
me,
sch
ool a
nd c
omm
unity
setti
ngs;
b)
iden
tific
atio
n of
ada
ptat
ions
and
sup
port
nee
ded
to f
unct
ion
in th
ose
setti
ngs;
c)
pioc
edur
esio
r w
orki
ng w
ith s
choo
l sta
ff a
nd f
amili
es to
inco
rpor
ate
soci
al s
kill
trai
ning
and
/or
prac
tice
into
sch
ool
and
fam
ily r
outin
es.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
prio
rity
1:1
CU
RR
ICU
LU
M P
LA
NN
ING
18.
The
sch
ool's
cur
ricu
la s
houl
d be
dev
elop
ed b
y te
ache
rs/s
taff
, stu
dent
s, p
aren
ts, a
dmin
istr
ator
s, a
ndco
mm
unity
mem
bers
and
sho
uld
iden
tify
age-
appr
opri
ate
cont
ent (
e.g.
, rea
ding
, mat
h, h
isto
ry, s
ocia
l/em
otio
nal,
arts
, hea
lth)
and
proc
ess
orie
nted
(pr
oble
m s
olvi
ng a
nd c
olla
bora
tion
skill
s, s
tudy
ski
lls)
goal
san
d ob
ject
ives
whi
ch p
rom
ote
mea
ning
ful p
artic
ipat
ion
in a
ge-a
ppro
pria
te a
ctiv
ities
in h
ome,
rec
rea-
tiona
l, ed
ucat
iona
l, w
ork
and
othe
r as
pect
s of
com
mun
ity li
fe, s
et a
hig
h st
anda
rd o
f ex
celle
nce
and
addr
ess
the
need
s of
all
stud
ents
.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
prio
rity
0
19.
A v
arie
ty o
f ag
e-ap
prop
riat
e no
n-sc
hool
inst
ruct
iona
l set
tings
(e.
g., d
ayca
re s
ettin
gs, t
he s
tude
nt's
hom
e,lo
cal s
tore
s, a
nd jo
b si
tes)
sho
uld
be a
vaila
ble
to s
tude
nts
and
mat
ched
to in
divi
dual
nee
ds f
or le
arni
ngne
w s
kills
or
for
gene
raliz
ing
skill
s to
new
set
tings
.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
itted
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
20.
The
pro
cess
for
iden
tifyi
ng c
urri
culu
m c
onte
nt f
or a
n in
divi
dual
stu
dent
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in b
asic
skill
and
/or
soci
al a
reas
sho
uld
incl
ude
an a
naly
sis
of th
e st
uden
t's s
kills
and
inte
rest
s an
d of
the
age-
appr
opri
ate
activ
ities
, ski
lls a
nd a
dapt
atio
ns n
eede
d fo
r th
e st
uden
t to
func
tion
in s
peci
fic
hom
e,sc
hool
, wor
k, r
ecre
atio
n an
d ot
her
com
mun
ity s
ettin
gs.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
'I'm
Und
ecid
ed
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
1
1
Page
3
![Page 84: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
BE
ST P
RA
CT
ICE
GU
IDE
LIN
ES
FOR
ME
ET
ING
TH
E N
EE
DS
OF
AL
L S
TU
DE
NT
S IN
LO
CA
L S
CH
OO
LS
Nee
d fo
r Im
prov
emen
tin
Our
Sch
ool
if a
Prio
rity
21.
Obj
ectiv
es f
or s
tude
nts
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in b
asic
ski
ll an
d/or
soc
ial a
reas
sho
uld
spec
ify
crite
ria
whi
ch in
clud
e pe
rfor
man
ce in
the
stud
ent's
hom
e, s
choo
l and
oth
er a
ge-a
ppro
pria
te c
omm
unity
set
tings
.I
Agr
eeI
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
22.
Stud
ents
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in b
asic
ski
ll an
d/or
soc
ial a
reas
sho
uld
have
pai
d w
ork
expe
rien
ces
inin
tegr
ated
com
mun
ity s
ettin
gs p
rior
to le
avin
g sc
hool
.I
Agr
eeI
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed / /D
on't
Kno
wpr
iori
ty
0
23.
The
sys
tem
for
mon
itori
ng th
e pr
ogre
ss o
f st
uden
ts w
ith in
tens
ive
need
s in
bas
ic s
kill
and/
or s
ocia
l are
assh
ould
incl
ude:
a)
indi
catio
ns o
f le
vel o
f in
depe
nden
ce o
n id
entif
ied
skill
s/ac
tiviti
es; b
) in
dica
tions
of
envi
ronm
ents
in w
hich
thos
e sk
ills/
activ
ities
hav
e be
en d
emon
stra
ted;
c)
an a
nnua
l sum
mar
y; a
ndd)
pos
t sch
ool f
ollo
w u
ps f
or p
urpo
ses
of p
rogr
am im
prov
emen
t.I
Agr
eeI
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
DE
LIV
ER
Y O
F IN
STR
UC
TIO
NA
L S
UPP
OR
T S
ER
VIC
ES
24.
Inst
ruct
iona
l sup
port
ser
vice
s an
d st
aff
(e.g
., C
hapt
er I
, spe
cial
edu
catio
n, s
peec
h an
d la
ngua
ge,
guid
ance
, pee
r tu
tori
ng)
shou
ld b
e iw
orpo
rate
d in
to o
ngoi
ng s
choo
l and
com
mun
ity a
ctiv
ities
.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
25.
The
dec
isio
n to
pul
l any
stu
dent
out
of
ongo
ing
scho
ol o
r co
mm
unity
act
iviti
es to
rec
eive
sup
port
serv
ices
sho
uld
be a
team
dec
isio
n ba
sed
upon
doc
umen
tatio
n th
at th
e st
uden
t's n
eeds
cou
ld n
ot b
eac
hiev
ed th
roug
h th
e us
e of
sup
plem
enta
ry a
ides
and
ser
vice
s in
the
clas
sroo
m. T
his
deci
sion
sho
uld
not b
e m
ade
base
d up
on s
taff
pre
fere
nces
.I
Agr
eeI
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
1
0
I.
I
26.
For
stud
ents
with
nee
ds (
e.g.
, cou
nsel
ing,
com
mun
ity-b
ased
trai
ning
, med
ical
) w
hich
can
not b
e m
etth
roug
h on
goin
g ac
tiviti
es, p
ull o
ut s
houl
d be
sch
edul
ed d
urin
g ac
tiviti
es w
hich
the
team
det
erm
ines
tobe
low
est p
rior
ity f
or th
e st
uden
t.I
Agr
eeI
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
27.
The
del
iver
y of
inst
ruc'
iona
l sup
port
ser
vice
s (e
.g.,
cons
ulta
tion,
trai
ning
, tec
hnic
al a
ssis
tanc
e,co
oper
ativ
e pl
anni
ng w
ith s
uppo
rt s
taff
, tea
m te
achi
ng w
ith s
uppo
rt s
taff
, sup
port
sta
ff d
eliv
erin
g di
rect
serv
ices
in th
e cl
assr
oom
, rel
ease
tim
e fo
r pl
anni
ng, a
cces
s to
inst
ruct
iona
l sup
port
team
s) s
houl
d in
clud
esu
ppor
t to
teac
hers
, tea
chin
g as
sist
ants
, vol
unte
ers,
and
oth
er d
irec
t ins
truc
tiona
l sta
ff.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
El
IND
IVID
UA
LIZ
ED
IN
STR
UC
TIO
N
28.
The
sch
ool s
houl
d pr
ovid
e al
l stu
dent
s w
ith o
ppor
tuni
ties
to s
et p
erso
nal g
oals
and
to p
lan,
with
par
ents
and
teac
hers
, how
thei
r go
als
will
be
addr
esse
d du
ring
the
scho
ol y
ear.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
prio
rity
0
1 ag
e 4
88
![Page 85: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
BE
ST P
RA
CI1
0E G
UIP
EU
NE
S FO
R M
EE
TIN
G T
HE
NE
ED
S O
F A
LL
ST
UD
EN
TS
IN L
OC
AL
SC
HO
OL
SN
eed
for
Impr
ovem
ent
in O
ur S
choo
l/ i
f a
Prio
rity
29.
The
sch
ool s
houl
d pr
ovid
e op
port
uniti
es f
or a
ll st
aff
to b
ecom
e pr
ofic
ient
at p
revi
ewin
g in
stru
ctio
nal
activ
ities
, giv
ing
clea
r w
ritte
n an
d ve
rbal
dir
ectio
ns, h
ecki
ng f
or s
tude
nt u
nder
stan
ding
and
giv
ing
stud
ents
con
stru
ctiv
e fe
edba
ck a
nd p
ositi
ve r
einf
orce
men
t.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
30.
The
sch
ool s
houl
d pr
ovid
e op
port
uniti
es f
or a
ll st
aff
to b
ecom
e pr
ofic
ient
in u
sing
a v
arie
ty o
fin
stru
ctio
nal m
etho
ds (
e.g.
, coo
pera
tive
lear
ning
, who
le la
ngua
ge, p
eer
tuto
ring
, dri
ll an
d pr
actic
e,in
cide
ntal
teac
hing
, com
pute
r-as
sist
ed in
stru
ctio
n), m
atch
ing
met
hods
to in
divi
dual
stu
dent
nee
ds, a
ndin
corp
orat
ing
met
hods
into
ong
oing
act
iviti
es.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
31.
A v
arie
ty o
f in
stru
ctio
nal g
roup
ings
(e.
g., s
mal
l gro
up, l
arge
gro
up, m
ulti-
aged
gro
ups,
coo
pera
tive
grou
p, in
divi
dual
inst
ruct
ion)
sho
uld
be a
vaila
ble
to a
ll st
uden
ts a
nd m
atch
ed to
indi
vidu
al s
tude
ntne
eds.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
prio
rity
0
.A
var
iety
of
inst
ruct
ors
(e.g
., te
ache
rs, t
each
er a
ssis
tant
s, s
ame-
age
peer
tuto
rs, c
ross
-age
pee
r tu
tors
,pe
er m
ento
rs, v
olun
teer
s) s
houl
d be
ava
ilabl
e to
stu
dent
s an
d m
atch
ed to
indi
vidu
al s
tude
nt n
eeds
.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
prio
rity
0
33.
The
sch
ool s
houl
d pr
ovid
e op
port
uniti
es f
or a
ll st
aff
to b
ecom
e pr
ofic
ient
at u
sing
a v
arie
ty o
f in
stru
c-tio
nal m
ater
ials
(e.
g., r
eal i
tem
s, p
hoto
grap
hs, d
raw
ings
, wor
k sh
eets
, tex
tboo
ks, a
udio
/vis
uals
), a
tm
atch
ing
mat
eria
ls to
indi
vidu
al s
tude
nt n
eeds
, and
inco
rpor
atin
g m
ater
ials
into
ong
oing
act
iviti
es.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
34.
The
sch
ool s
houl
d pr
ovid
e op
port
uniti
es f
or a
ll st
aff
to b
ecom
e pr
ofic
ient
at t
each
ing
seve
ral d
iffe
rent
goal
s fr
om th
e sa
me
curr
icul
um a
rea
thro
ugh
a si
ngle
gro
up a
ctiv
ity (
e.g.
, dur
ing
a gr
oup
mat
h ac
tivity
som
e st
uden
ts m
ay b
e le
arni
ng a
dditi
on w
hile
oth
ers
are
lear
ning
cou
ntin
g or
one
-to-
one
corr
espo
n-de
nce)
.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
35.
1
The
sch
ool s
houl
d pr
ovid
e op
port
uniti
es f
or a
ll st
aff
to b
ecom
e pr
ofic
ient
at t
each
ing
goal
s fr
omdi
ffer
ent c
urri
culu
m a
reas
thro
ugh
a si
ngle
gro
up a
ctiv
ity (
e.g.
, dur
ing
a gr
oup
soci
al s
tudi
es a
ctiv
ityso
me
stud
ents
may
hav
e a
prim
ary
goal
of
lear
ning
the
soci
al s
tudi
es c
onte
nt w
hile
oth
ers
have
pri
mar
ygo
als
of le
arni
ng la
ngua
ge, c
omm
unic
atio
n, o
r so
cial
ski
lls).
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
.1
Page
5
![Page 86: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
Nee
d fo
r Im
prov
emen
tB
EST
PR
AC
TIC
E G
UID
EL
INE
S FO
R M
EE
TIN
G T
HE
NE
ED
S O
F A
LL
ST
UD
EN
TS
IN L
OC
AL
SC
HO
OL
Sin
Our
Sch
ool
36.
The
sch
ool s
houl
d pr
ovid
e op
port
uniti
es f
or a
ll st
aff
and
stud
ents
to b
ecom
e pr
ofic
ient
at i
dent
ifyi
ng a
vari
ety
of w
ays
stud
ents
can
acq
uire
or
dem
onst
rate
ski
lls/k
now
ledg
e (e
.g.,
sign
ing,
wri
ting,
typi
ng,
gest
urin
g, o
ral t
ests
or
repo
rts,
art
dis
play
s, ta
ped
pres
enta
tions
), m
atch
ing
them
to in
divi
dual
stu
dent
need
s, a
nd in
corp
orat
ing
them
into
ong
oing
act
iviti
es.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hM
ediu
mL
owD
on't
Nee
dN
eed
Nee
d K
now
if a
Prio
rity
Am
moo
rPr
iori
ty
37.
For
each
less
on c
urre
ntly
bei
ng ta
ught
, the
re s
houl
d be
a w
ritte
n in
stru
ctio
nal p
rogr
am o
r le
sson
pla
nw
hich
is a
vaila
ble
to a
ll di
rect
inst
ruct
iona
l sta
ff.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hM
ediu
mL
owD
on't
Nee
dN
eed
Nee
d K
now
Prio
rity
38.
Stud
ent p
rogr
ess
shou
ld b
e m
onito
red
and
anal
yzed
on
a re
gula
rly
sche
dule
d ba
sis.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hM
ediu
mL
owD
on't
Nee
dN
eed
Nee
d K
now
39.
Dec
isio
ns to
mod
ify
inst
ruct
iona
l gro
upin
gs, m
etho
ds o
r m
ater
ials
sho
uld
be b
ased
upo
n m
easu
res
ofH
igh
Med
ium
Low
Don
'tst
uden
t pro
gres
s.N
eed
Nee
dN
eed
Kno
w
I A
grE
.:I
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
Prio
rity
Prio
rity
40.
A c
urre
nt s
ched
ule
of d
aily
stu
dent
act
iviti
es w
hich
des
crib
es w
hat i
s be
ing
done
, whe
n, a
nd w
ithH
igh
Med
ium
Low
Don
't
who
m, s
houl
d be
ava
ilabl
e an
d re
adily
acc
essi
ble.
Nee
dN
eed
Nee
d K
now
Agr
eeI
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
Prio
rity
CI
TR
AN
SIT
ION
PL
AN
NIN
G
41T
here
sho
uld
be p
roce
dure
s fo
r fa
cilit
atin
g th
e sm
ooth
tran
sitio
n of
all
stud
ents
fro
m o
ne e
duca
tiona
lse
tting
to a
noth
er, a
nd f
rom
sch
ool t
o po
st-s
choo
l lif
e.I
Agr
eeI
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
42.
A w
ritte
n pl
an f
or tr
ansi
tioni
ng e
ach
stud
ent w
ith in
tens
ive
need
s, in
clud
ing
stud
ents
who
are
gif
ted,
from
one
edu
catio
nal s
ettin
g to
ano
ther
sho
uld
be d
evel
oped
and
impl
emen
ted
in a
dvan
ce o
f th
e m
ove
(e.g
., 6
to 9
mon
ths)
.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
43.
For
high
sch
ool a
ged
stud
ents
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds,
a w
ritte
n gr
adua
tion
plan
for
tran
sitio
n to
pos
tsc
hool
life
(e.
g., e
mpl
oym
ent,
educ
atio
n, r
ecre
atio
n, r
esid
entia
l) s
houl
d be
dev
elop
ed a
nd im
plem
ente
dw
ell i
n ad
vanc
e of
the
tran
sitio
n (e
.g.,
at a
ge f
ourt
een)
and
rev
iew
ed a
nnua
lly.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Ilee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
Prio
rity
Cl
Prio
rity
FAM
ILY
-SC
HO
OL
CO
LL
AB
OR
AT
ION
44.
The
sch
ool s
houl
d pr
Ovi
de f
amili
es w
ith th
e fr
eedo
m to
vis
it th
e sc
hool
and
to c
omm
unic
ate
regu
larl
yw
ith s
choo
l sta
ff o
n to
pics
impo
rtan
t to
both
the
fam
ily a
nd th
e sc
hool
.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hM
ediu
mL
owD
on't
Nee
dN
eed
Nee
d K
now
Prio
rity
Page
6
9 1
5 2
![Page 87: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
93
BE
ST P
RA
CT
ICE
GU
IDE
LIN
ES
FOR
ME
ET
ING
TH
E N
EE
DS
OF
AL
L S
TU
DE
NT
S IN
LO
CA
L S
CH
OO
LS
Nee
d fo
r Im
prov
emen
tin
Our
Sch
ool
if a
Prio
rity
45.
The
re s
houl
d be
info
rmat
ion
avai
labl
e to
fam
ilies
whi
ch w
ill a
ssis
t the
m to
acc
ess
info
rmal
sup
port
netw
orks
and
con
nect
with
com
mun
ity r
esou
rces
(e.
g., d
ayca
re p
rogr
ams,
rec
reat
ion
prog
ram
s,co
unse
ling,
res
pite
car
e, v
ocat
iona
l reh
abili
tatio
n, m
enta
l hea
lth).
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
d
Med
ium
Nee
d
Low
Nee
d
Low
Nee
d
Don
'tK
now
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
Prio
rity
046
.T
he s
choo
l sho
uld
prov
ide
fam
ilies
with
opp
ortu
nitie
s fo
r co
nsul
tatio
n, tr
aini
ng a
nd f
ollo
w-u
p fr
omsc
hool
sta
ff to
max
imiz
e th
eir
child
ren'
s de
velo
pmen
t in
hom
e an
d ot
her
com
mun
ity s
ettin
gs.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
47.
Fam
ilies
sho
uld
be in
clud
ed in
adv
isor
y, d
ecis
ion-
mak
ing,
and
adv
ocac
y ac
tiviti
es o
f th
e sc
hool
(e.
g.,
advi
sory
com
mitt
ees,
cur
ricu
lum
com
mitt
ees,
dev
elop
men
t of
the
scho
ol p
hilo
soph
y an
d cl
imat
e, s
choo
lpl
anni
ng te
ams,
sta
ff d
evel
opm
ent c
omm
ittee
s).
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
48. IFa
mili
es s
houl
d he
incl
uded
in th
e de
cisi
on-m
akin
g pr
oces
s to
det
erm
ine
the
high
pri
ority
edu
catio
nal
need
s of
thei
r ch
ildre
n, a
nd h
ow a
nd w
here
(sc
hool
, hom
e, o
r co
mm
unity
set
tings
) th
eir
child
ren
will
be
taug
ht.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
49.
Inst
ruct
iona
l pla
nnin
g sh
ould
incl
ude
proc
edur
es f
or a
ssis
ting
fam
ilies
to in
corp
orat
e in
stru
ctio
n an
d /o
rpr
actic
e of
ski
lls in
to o
ngoi
ng h
ome
and
com
mun
ity a
ctiv
ities
.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
Ci
PLA
NN
ING
FO
R C
ON
TIN
UE
D B
EST
PR
AC
TIC
E I
MPR
OV
EM
EN
T
I5
.A
pla
n fo
r im
prov
ing
best
pra
ctic
e-ba
sed
serv
ices
with
in th
e sc
hool
sho
uld
be d
evel
oped
eve
ry th
ree
tofi
ve y
ears
by
a sc
hool
pla
nnin
g te
am c
onsi
stin
g of
adm
inis
trat
ors,
sta
ff, s
tude
nts,
par
ents
, sch
ool b
oard
mem
bers
and
oth
er c
omm
unity
mem
bers
.I
Agr
eeI
Dis
agre
eI'm
Und
ecid
ed
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
51.
The
sch
ool's
pla
n sh
ould
incl
ude:
a)
a re
view
of
the
scho
ol's
goa
ls a
nd th
e ex
tent
to w
hich
goa
ls a
nd b
est
educ
atio
nal p
ract
ices
are
ach
ieve
d; b
) an
exa
min
atio
n of
ser
vice
s of
fere
d by
the
scho
ol a
nd h
ow t1
..-j
rela
te to
stu
dent
, fam
ily, a
nd c
omm
unity
nee
ds; c
) fo
llow
-up
mea
sure
s of
stu
dent
s' p
erfo
rman
ce in
the
next
sch
ool s
ettin
g or
pos
t sch
ool s
ettin
gs; a
nd d
) ac
tiviti
es a
nd ti
mel
ines
for
impr
ovin
g be
st p
ract
ices
.
1 A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Low
Nee
dN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
r411
52.
The
sch
ool p
lann
ing
team
sho
uld
mee
t per
iodi
cally
to m
onito
r pr
ogre
ss o
n im
plem
entin
g th
e sc
hool
'spl
an a
nd to
mak
e ne
cess
ary
adju
stm
ents
in a
ctiv
ities
and
tim
elin
es f
or a
chie
ving
the
plan
.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
O Page
7
![Page 88: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
CE
GU
IDE
LIN
ES
FOR
ME
ET
ING
TH
E N
EE
DS
OF
AL
L S
TU
DE
NT
S IN
LO
CA
L S
CH
OO
LS
Nee
d fo
r Im
prov
emen
tin
Our
Sch
ool
II(
if a
Prio
rity
53.
The
sch
ool's
pla
n an
d su
bseq
uent
rep
orts
of
prog
ress
in im
plem
entin
g th
e pl
ansh
ould
be
diss
emin
ated
to p
aren
ts, s
choo
l dis
tric
t sta
ff a
nd c
omm
unity
mem
bers
.
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
54. I. _\.
The
re s
houl
d be
a p
erio
dic
eval
uatio
n of
the
plan
ning
pro
cess
by
scho
ol s
taff
, stu
dent
s, p
aren
ts,
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs a
nd p
erso
ns f
rom
out
side
of
the
scho
ol (
e,g.
,sta
ff f
rom
oth
er s
choo
ls, c
olle
ges
and
univ
ersi
ties,
sta
te a
nd lo
cal g
over
nmen
t).
I A
gree
I D
isag
ree
I'm U
ndec
ided
Hig
hN
eed
Med
ium
Nee
dL
owN
eed
Don
'tK
now
Prio
rity
0
Com
men
ts
Page
856
![Page 89: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
(Best Practice Survey Summary Chart:
School Date
Number of People Who Answered the Best Practice Survey by Title
PrincipalSpecial education administratorGeneral education teachersSpecial education teachersNon-core teachers (music. art)Related service providersSupport staffStudentsParentsCommunity membersOther
Total Number of People
Instructions
The Best Practice Survey Summary Chart allows for the summarizing of thefollowing information from the Best Practice Survey.
1. The percentage of persons who agree with, disagree with, or are undecidedabout each best practice addressed within the survey.
2. The percentage of persons who feel the level of need for improvement for eachbest practice is either high, medium, low or are undecided about the level ofneed for improvement.
3. The number of persons who indicated each best practice was a priority forimprovement by checking the box-next to the practice on the best practicesurvey.\
![Page 90: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
Best Practice Survey Summary Chart Level of Agreementwith Practice
Level of Need forImprovement in Our
School# of Priority
Checks
SCHOOL CLIMATE AND STRUCTURE II
1. The school's philosophy statement and objectivesshould be developed by administrators, staff, stu-dents, parents, school board members and othercommunity members and should reflect the school'scommitment to meeting the individual needs of allstudents in age-appropriate integrated school andcommunity settings.
2. The school's climate should be established by admin-istrators, staff, students, parents school board mem-bers and other community members and shouldpromote respect for individual differences amongstudents, encourage the development of positive self-esteem, establish high achievement expectations for allstudents, and encourage the development of caringpersonal relationships among students and staff.
3. The school's code of conduct for students and staffshould be established by administrators, staff, stu-dents, parents, school board members and othercommunity members and should emphasize positivebthavior, be applied in a consistent, fair manner, andtake into account the unique needs of individualstudents.
. The school should provide ample opportunities forstudents, staff, parents, administrators, school boardmembers and other community members to berecognized for their accomplishments, includinghelping others.
. The general roles and responsibilities of all school staff(including contracted staff such as an occupationaltherapist or psychologist) relative to providinginstruction and support to all students should beclearly delineated by administrators, staff, students,parents, school board members and other communitymembers.
. The school's professional development process shouldbe developed by administrators, staff, students,parents, school board members and other communitymembers and should include inservice training,regularly scheduled observations with feedback,technical assistance, peer coaching, and mentoring.
. The school's instructional support system (e.g.,classroom-based model for delivering support serv-ices, teacher assistance team, individual studentplanning teams, special education pre-referral process,volunteer system) should be developed by administra-tors, staff, students, parents, school board membersand other community members and should be avail-able to all students and staff.
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
/
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
0
0
11
0
ri
0
![Page 91: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
Best Praaice Survey Summary Chart Level of Agreementwith Practice
Level of Need forImprovement in Our
School* of Priority
Checks
COLLABORATIVE PLANNING
8. The school should provide opportunities for schoolstaff, students, family members, and communitymembers to become proficient at functioning in acollaborative manner (i.e., share responsibility andresources, make decisions by consensus, use a struc-tured meeting agenda format, rotate team roles offacilitator, timekeeper and recorder).
. The school should provide time during school hoursfor instructional support teams (e.g., individualstudent planning teams, teacher assistance teams,teaching teams) to meet and for individual teammembers to monitor services, and to provide timelyconsultation, support and technical assistance tofamilies and staff.
10. For students with intensive needs in basic skill and /orsocial skill areas or who are challenged by their giftsand talents, individual student planning teams shouldbe convened which are responsible for the develop-ment and implementation of all aspects of thestudent's educational program (e.g., student goals,student schedules, procedures to address learning/behavior/management issues, transition plans,strategies to support the student and his/her teachersand family).
11. !ndividual student planning teams should consist ofthe student, family members, the student's generalclass teacher(s) and other appropriate persons basedupon the student's needs (e.g., principal, Chapter Iteacher, music teacher, physical therapist, one or twoof the student's peers, teaching assistant, specialeducator, social worker, representatives of communityagencies, family advocates).
12. The role of each individual student planning teammember, including related service providers and otherconsultants, should be specified by the team andshould be supportive of the educational needs of thestudent.
SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY
13. The school should facilitate the development of socialresponsibility and self-reliance by promoting studentparticipation in volunteer organizations and activities(e.g., community service activities, peer tutoring/mentoring activities, student government, participa-tion in decision making about important school crcommunity issues). .
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Loit% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
!al
o
al
CI
o
n
Page 2
![Page 92: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
Bast Practice Survey Summary Chart
14. The school's curriculum should provide structuredopportunities for students to learn about and appreci-ate individual differences among people.
15. The school's curriculum should provide structuredopportunities for students to develop appropriatesocial skills (e.g., making friends, cooperating withothers, sharing, listening, avoiding fighting) whichinclude frequent practice during school, home andcommunity activities.
16. The school should provide opportunities for allstudents to participate in age-appropriate schoolsponsored extra-curricular activities (e.g., field trips,sports teanis, clubs, dances, assemblies, studentgovernment).
17. For students with intensive needs in the social skillarea, a program for increasing social skills should bedeveloped which includes: a) assessment of currentskills in identified home, school and communitysettings; b) identification of adaptations and supportneeded to function in these settings; c) procedures forworking with school staff and families to incorporatesocial skill training and/or practice into school andfamily routines.
CURRICULUM PLANNING
18. The school's curricula should be developed by teach-ers/staff, students, parents, administrators, andcommunity members and should identify age-appro-priate content (e.g., reading, math, history, social/emotional, arts, health) and process oriented (problemsolving and collaboration skills, study skills) goals andubjectives which promote meaningful participation inage-E.ppropriate activities in home, recreational,educational, work and other aspects of communitylife, set a high standard of excellence and address theneeds of all students.
19. A variety of age-appropriate non-school instructionalsettings (e.g., daycare settings, the student's home,local stores, and job sites) should be available tostudents and matched to individual needs for learningnew skills or for generalizing skills to new settings.
20. The process for identifying curriculum content for anindividual student with intensive needs in basic skilland/or social areas should include an analysis of thestudent's skills and interests and of the age-appropri-ate activities, skills and adaptations needed for thestudent to function in specific home, school, work,recreation and other community settings.
Level of Agreementwith Practice
Level of Need forImprovement in Our
School
"g-Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
# of PriorityChecks
171
Page 3
![Page 93: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
Best Practice Suivey Summary ChartLevel of Need for
Level of Agreement Improvement in Our # of Prioritywith Practice School Checks
21. Objectives for students with intensive needs in basicskill and/or social areas should specify criteria whichinclude performance in the student's home, schooland other age-appropriate community settings.
22. Students with intensive needs in basic skill and/orsocial areas should have paid wot k experiences inintegrated community settings prior to leaving school.
23. The system for monitoring the progress of studentswith intensive needs in basic skill and/or social areasshould include: a) indications of level of indepen-dence on identified skills/activities; b) indications ofenvironments in which those skills/activities havebeen demonstrated; c) an annual summary; and d)post school follow ups for purposes of programimprovement.
DELIVERY OF INSTRUCTIONAL SUPPORT SERVICES
24. Instructional support services and staff (e.g., ChapterI, special education, speech and language, guidance,peer tutoring) should be incorporated into ongoingschool and community activities.
.
25. The decision to pull any student out of ongoing schoolor community activities to receive support services
beshould a team decision based upon documentationthat the student's needs could not be achievedthrough the use of supplementary aides and servicesin the classroom. This decision should not be mcdebased upon staff preferences.
26. For students with needs (e.g., counseling, community-based training, medical) which cannot be met throughongoing activities, pull out should be scheduledduring activities which the team determines to belowest priority for the student.
27. The delivery of instructional support services (e.g.,consultation, training, technical assistance, coopera-five planning with support staff, team teaching withsupport staff, support staff delivering direct servicesin the classroom, release time for planning, access toinstructional support teams) should include supportto teachers, teaching assistants, volunteers, and otherdirect instructional staff.
INDIVIDUALIZED INSTRUCIION
28. The school should provide all students with opportu-nities to set personal goals and to plan, with parentsand teachers, how their goals will be addressedduring the school year. -
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
%% Disagree
Agree
% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medi um% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
711
7:1
71
0
71
El
r/
73
Page 4
![Page 94: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
Best Practice Survey Summary Chart Level of Agreementwith Practice
Level of Need forImprovement in Our # of Priority
School Checks
29. The school should provide opportunities for all staff tobecome proficient at previewing instructional activi-ties, giving clear written and verbal directions, check-ing for student understanding and giving studentsconstructive feedback and positive reinforcement.
30. The school should provide opportunities for all staff tobecome proficient in using a variety of instructionalmethods (e.g., cooperative learning, whole language,peer tutoring, drill and practice, incidental teaching,computer-assisted instruction), matching methods toindividual student needs, and incorporating methodsinto ongoing activities.
31. A variety of instructional groupings (e.g., small group,large group, multi-aged groups, cooperative group,individual instruction) should be available to allstudents and matched to individual student needs.
32. A variety of instructors (e.g., teachers, teacher assis-tants, same-age peer tutors, cross-age peer tutors, peermentors, volunteers) should be available to studentsand matched to individual student needs.
33. The school should provide opportunities for all staff tobecome proficient at using a variety of instructionalmaterials (e.g., real items, photographs, drawings,work sheets, textbooks, audio visuals), at matchingmaterials to individual student needs, and incorporat-ing materials into ongoing activities.
34. The school should provide opportunities for all staff tobecome proficient at teaching several different goalsfrom the same curriculum area through a single groupactivity (e.g., during a group math activity somestudents may be learning addition while others arelearning counting or one-to-one correspondence).
35. The school should provide opportunities for all staff tobecome proficient at teaching goals from differentcurriculum areas through a single group activity (e.g.,during a group social studies activity some studentsmay have a primary goal of learning the social studiescontent while others have primary goals of learninglanguage, communication, or social skills).
36. The school should provide opportunities for all staffand students to become proficient at identifying avariety of ways students can acquire or demonstrateskills/knowledge (e.g., signing, writing, typing,gesturing, oral tests or reports, art displays, tapedpresentations), matching them to individual studentneeds, and incorporating them into ongoing activities.
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Diwgree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree.% Disag -ee% Unde. ided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
Page 5
1u2
![Page 95: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
Best Practice Survey Summary ChartLevel of Need for
Level of Agreement Improvement in Our # of Prioritywith Practice School Checks
37. For each lesson currently being taught, there shouldbe : written instructional program or lesson planwhich is available to all direct instructional staff.
38. Student progress should be monitored and analyzedon a regularly schaduled basis.
39. Decisions to modify instructional groupings, methodsor materials should be based upon measures ofstudent progress.
40. A current schedule of daily student activities whichdescribes what is being done, when, and with whom,should be available and readily accessible.
TRANSITION PLANNING
41. There should be procedures for facilitating the smoothtransition of all students from one educational settingto another, and from school to post-school life.
42. A written plan for transitioning each student withintensive needs, including students who are gifted,from one educational setting to another should bedeveloped and implemented in advance of the move(e.g., 6 to 9 months).
43. For high school aged students with intensive needs, awritten graduation plan for transition to post schoollife (e.g., employment, education, recreation, residen-tial) should be developed and implemented well inadvance of the transition (e.g., at age fourteen) andreviewed annually.
FAMILY-SCHOOL COLLABORATION
44. The school should provide fa.milies with the freedomto visit the school and to communicate regularly withschool staff on topics important to both the family andthe school.
45. There should be information available to familieswhich will assist them to access informal supportnetworks and connect with community resources (e.g.,daycare programs, recreation programs, counseling,respite care, vocational rehabilitation, mental health).
46. The school should provide families with opportunitiesfor consultation, training and follow-up from schoolstaff to maximize their children's development inhome and other community settings.
-
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% D5.sagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree%
% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
CI
017:1
171
171
lal
0
_771
CIO
17/
Page 6
103
![Page 96: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
Best Practice Survey Summary ChartLevel of Need for
Level of Agreement Improvement in Ourwith Practice School
# of PriorityChecks
47. Families should be included in advisory, decision-making, and advocacy activities of the school (e.g.,advisory committees, curriculum committees, devel-opment of the school philosophy and climate, schoolplanning teams, staff development committees).
48. Families should be included in the decision-makingprocess to determine the high priority educationalneeds of their children, and how and where (school,home, or community settings) their children will betaught.
49. Instructional planning should include procedures forassisting families to incorporate instruction and/orpractice of skills into ongoing home and communityactivities.
PLANNING FOR CONTINUED BEST PRACTICEIMPROVEMENT
50. A plan for improving best practice-based serviceswithin the school should be developed every three tofive years by a school planning team consisting ofadministrators, staff, students, parents, school boardmembers and other community members.
51. The school's plan should include: a) a review of theschool's goals and the extent to which goals and besteducational practices are achieved; b) an examinationof services offered by the school and how they relateto student, family, and community needs; c) follow-up measures of students' performance in the nextschool setting or post school settings; and d) acdvitiesand timelines for improving best practices.
52. The school planning team should meet periodically tomonitor progress on implementing the school's planand to make necessary adjustments in activities andtimelines for achieving the plan.
53. The school's plan and subsequent reports of progressin implementing the plan should be disseminated toparents, school district staff and community mem-bers.
54. There should be a periodic evaluation of the planningprocess by school staff, students, parents, communitymembers and persons from outside of the school (e,g,.staff from other schools, colleges and universities,state and local government).
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Di sagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% .1 .gree% Disagree% Undecided
% Agree% Disagree% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
% High% Medium% Low% Undecided
1:71
71/
ri
0
CI
0141
Page 7
1 (2 4
![Page 97: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
Best Practice SelectionWorksheet
School Date
Instructions
The first step in completing the Best Practice Selection Worksheet is to identifypractices to be considered for improvement. At least 10 practices should be
identified. As each practice is identified the small box on the worksheetlocated in the column titled Select should be checked.
1. Categorize the Possible Changes Needed: Circle P if policy changes areneeded to improve the practice's availability. Circle S if service delivery systemchanges are needed for improvement (e.g., reallocating teacher time, changing jobroles, hiring additional staff, arranging team meeting time during school hours,initiating a community-based training program). Circle T if training is toeded todevelop or implement the changes.
2. Determine Priority Ranking: Based upon the information gathered throughthe surveys and the estimation of the types of changes needed, each practiceshould be ranked from the most important practice to target for improvement (1=highest ranking) to the least important. If several practices carry equal impor-tance, they may be assigned the same-ranking. It is recommended that at least 10statements be ranked.
ti
![Page 98: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
Bes
t Pra
ctic
e Se
lect
ion
Wor
kshe
etB
est P
ract
ice
Gui
delin
es F
or M
eetin
g T
he N
eeds
Of
All
Stud
ents
In
Loc
al S
choo
ls
SCH
OO
L C
LIM
AT
E A
ND
ST
RU
CT
UR
E
1.T
he s
choo
l's p
hilo
soph
y st
atem
ent a
nd o
bjec
tives
are
dev
elop
ed b
y ad
min
istr
ator
s, s
taff
,st
uden
ts, p
aren
ts. s
choo
l boa
rd m
embe
rs a
nd o
ther
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs a
nd r
efle
ct th
esc
hool
's c
omm
itmen
t to
mee
ting
the
indi
vidu
al n
eeds
of
all s
tude
nts
in a
ge-a
ppro
pria
te r
egu-
lar
educ
atio
n an
d co
mm
unity
set
tings
.
2.T
he s
choo
l's c
limat
e is
est
ablis
hed
by a
dmin
istr
ator
s, s
taff
, stu
dent
s, p
aren
ts s
choo
l boa
rdm
embe
rs a
nd o
ther
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs a
nd p
rom
otes
res
pect
for
indi
vidu
al d
iffe
renc
esam
ong
stud
ents
, enc
oura
ges
the
deve
lopm
ent o
f po
sitiv
e se
lf-e
stee
m, e
stab
lishe
s hi
ghac
hiev
emen
t exp
ecta
tions
for
all
stud
ents
, and
enc
oura
ges
the
deve
lopm
ent o
f ca
ring
per
sona
lre
latio
nshi
ps a
mon
g st
uden
ts a
nd s
taff
.
3.T
he s
choo
l's c
ode
of c
ondu
ct f
or s
tude
nts
and
staf
f is
est
ablis
hed
by a
dmin
istr
ator
s, s
taff
,st
uden
ts, p
aren
ts, s
choo
l boa
rd m
embe
rs a
nd o
ther
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs, e
mph
asiz
es p
osi-
tive
13,4
1avi
or, i
s ap
plie
d in
a c
onsi
sten
t, fa
ir m
anne
r, a
nd ta
kes
into
acc
ount
the
uniq
ue n
eeds
of in
divi
dual
stu
dent
s.
4.T
he s
choo
l pro
vide
s am
ple
oppo
rtun
ities
for
stu
dent
s, s
taff
, adm
inis
trat
ors,
par
ents
, sch
ool
boar
d m
embe
rs a
nd o
ther
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs to
be
reco
gniz
ed f
or th
eir
acco
mpl
ishm
ents
,in
clud
ing
help
ing
othe
rs.
5.T
he g
ener
al r
oles
and
res
pons
ibili
ties
of a
ll sc
hool
sta
ff (
incl
udin
g co
ntra
cted
sta
ff s
uch
as a
noc
cupa
tiona
l the
rapi
st o
r ps
ycho
logi
st)
rela
tive
to p
rovi
ding
inst
ruct
ion
and
supp
ort t
o al
lst
uden
ts a
re c
lear
ly d
elin
eate
d ty
adm
inis
trat
ors,
sta
ff, s
tude
nts,
par
ents
, sch
ool b
oard
mem
bers
and
oth
er c
omm
unity
mem
bers
.
6.T
he s
choo
l's p
rofe
ssio
nal d
evel
opm
ent p
roce
ss is
dev
elop
ed b
y ad
min
istr
ator
s, s
taff
, stu
dent
s,pa
rent
s, s
choo
l boa
rd m
embe
rs a
nd o
ther
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs a
nd in
clud
es in
serv
ice
trai
n-in
g, r
egul
arly
sch
edul
ed o
bser
vatio
ns w
ith f
eedb
ack,
tech
nica
l ass
ista
nce,
pee
r co
achi
ng, a
ndm
ento
ring
.
7.T
he s
choo
l's in
stru
ctio
nal s
uppo
rt s
yste
m (
e.g.
, cla
ssro
om-b
ased
mod
el f
or d
eliv
erin
g su
ppor
tse
rvic
es, t
each
er a
ssis
tanc
e te
am, i
ndiv
idua
l stu
dent
pla
nnin
g te
ams,
spe
cial
edu
catio
n pr
e-re
ferr
al p
roce
ss, v
olun
teer
sys
tem
) is
dev
elop
ed b
y ad
min
istr
ator
s, s
taff
, stu
dent
s, p
aren
ts,
scho
ol b
oard
mem
bers
and
oth
er c
omm
unity
mem
bers
and
is a
vaila
ble
to a
ll st
uden
ts a
ndst
aff.
S =
Sys
tem
sP
= P
olic
y or
Pro
cedu
res
T =
Tra
inin
g
1 ts
Sele
cted
(I(
Box
)C
hang
esPr
iori
tyN
eede
d(1
= H
ighe
st)
[ 7
1S
P T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
167
![Page 99: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
168
Bes
t Pra
ctic
e Se
lect
ion
Wor
kshe
etSe
lect
edch
ange
spr
iori
ty
Bes
t Pra
ctic
e G
uide
lines
For
Mee
ting
The
Nee
ds O
f A
ll St
uden
ts I
nL
ocal
Sch
ools
(1 B
ox)
Nee
ded
(1 =
Hig
hest
)
CO
LL
AB
OR
AV
VE
PL
AN
NIN
G
8.T
he s
choo
l pro
vide
s op
port
uniti
es f
or s
taff
, stu
dent
s, f
amily
mem
bers
, and
com
mun
ity m
em-
bers
to b
ecom
e pr
ofic
ient
at f
unct
ioni
ng in
a c
olla
bora
tive
man
ner
(i.e
..sh
are
resp
onsi
bilit
yan
d re
soum
es, m
ake
deci
sion
s by
con
sens
us, u
se a
str
uctu
red
mee
ting
agen
dafo
rmat
, rot
ate
team
rol
es o
f fa
cilit
ator
, tim
ekee
per
and
reco
rder
).
9.T
he s
choo
l pro
vide
s tim
e du
ring
sch
ool h
ours
for
inst
ruct
iona
l sup
port
team
s(e
.g..
indi
vidu
alst
uden
t pla
nnin
g te
ams,
teac
her
assi
stan
ce te
ams.
teac
hing
team
s) to
mee
t and
for
indi
vidu
alte
am m
embe
rs to
mon
itor
serv
ices
, and
to p
rovi
de ti
mel
y co
nsul
tatio
n, s
uppo
rtan
d te
chni
cal
assi
stan
ce to
fam
ilies
and
sta
ff.
10.
For
stud
ents
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in b
asic
ski
ll an
d/or
soc
ial s
kill
area
s or
who
are
chal
leng
edby
thei
r gi
fts
and
tale
nts,
indi
vidu
al s
tude
nt p
lann
ing
team
s ar
e co
nven
ed w
hich
are
res
pon-
sibl
e fo
r th
e de
velo
pmen
t and
impl
emen
tatio
n of
all
aspe
cts
of th
e st
uden
t'sed
ucat
iona
lpr
ogra
m (
e.g.
. stu
dent
goa
ls, s
tude
nt s
ched
ules
, pro
cedu
res
toad
dres
s le
arni
ng /
beha
vior
/m
anag
emen
t iss
ues,
tran
sitio
n pl
ans,
str
ateg
ies
to s
uppo
rt th
e st
uden
t and
his/
her
teac
hers
and
fam
ily).
11.
Indi
vidu
al s
tude
nt p
lann
ing
team
s co
nsis
t of
the
stud
ent,
fam
ily m
embe
rs, t
hest
uden
t'sge
nera
l cla
ss te
ache
r(s)
and
oth
er a
ppro
pria
te p
erso
ns b
ased
upo
n th
e st
uden
t'sne
eds
(e.g
.,pr
inci
pal,
Cha
pter
1 te
ache
r, m
usic
teac
her,
phy
sica
l the
rapi
st, o
ne o
r tw
o of
the
stud
ent's
peer
s. te
achi
ng a
ssir
.tant
, spe
cial
edu
cato
r, s
ocia
lwor
ker,
rep
rese
ntat
ives
of
com
mun
ityag
enci
es, f
amily
adv
ocat
es).
12.
The
indi
vidu
al r
oles
of
each
stu
dent
pla
nnin
g te
am m
embe
r, in
clud
ing
rela
ted
serv
ice
prov
id-
ers
and
othe
r co
nsul
tant
s, a
re s
peci
fied
by
the
team
and
are
supp
ortiv
e of
the
educ
atio
nal
need
s of
the
stud
ent.
SOC
IAL
RE
SPO
NSI
BIL
ITY
13.
The
sch
ool f
acili
tate
s th
e de
velo
pmen
t of
soci
al r
espo
nsib
ility
and
sel
f-re
lianc
e by
pro
mot
ing
stud
ent p
artic
ipat
ion
in v
olun
teer
org
aniz
atio
ns a
nd a
ctiv
ities
(e.
g., c
omm
unity
ser
vice
act
ivi-
ties,
pee
r tu
tori
ng/m
ento
ring
act
iviti
es, s
tutie
nt g
over
nmen
t, pa
rtic
ipat
ion
inde
cisi
on m
akin
gab
out i
mpo
rtan
t sch
ool o
r co
mm
unity
issu
es).
rage
2I
S =
Sys
tem
sP
= P
olic
y or
Pro
cedu
res
T =
Tra
inin
g
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
![Page 100: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
Bes
t Pra
ctic
e Se
lect
ion
Wor
kshe
etB
est P
ract
ice
Gui
delin
es F
or M
?etin
g T
he N
eeds
Of
All
Stud
ents
In
Loc
al S
choo
lsSe
lect
edC
hang
esPr
iori
ty(4
/ Box
)N
eede
d(1
= H
ighe
st)
14.
The
sch
ool's
cur
ricu
lum
pro
vide
s st
ruct
ured
opp
ortu
nitie
s fo
r st
uden
ts to
lear
n ab
out a
ndap
prec
iate
indi
vidu
al d
iffe
renc
es a
mon
g pe
ople
.
15.
The
sch
ool's
cur
ricu
lum
pro
vide
s st
ruct
ured
opp
ortu
nitie
s fo
r st
uden
ts to
dev
elop
app
ropr
iate
soci
al s
kills
(e.
g.. m
akin
g fr
iend
s, c
oope
ratin
g w
ith o
ther
s, s
hari
ng. l
iste
ning
, avo
idin
g fi
ghtin
g)w
hich
incl
ude
freq
uent
pra
ctic
e du
ring
sch
ool,
hom
e an
d co
mm
unity
act
iviti
es.
16.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
stud
ents
to p
artic
ipat
e in
age
-app
ropr
iate
sch
ool
spon
sore
d ex
tra-
curr
icul
ar a
ctiv
ities
(e.
g.. f
ield
trip
s, s
port
s te
ams,
clu
bs, d
ance
s, a
ssem
blie
s,st
uden
t gov
ernm
ent)
.
17.
For
stud
ents
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in th
e so
cial
ski
ll ar
ea, a
n in
divi
dual
pro
gram
for
incr
easi
ngso
cial
ski
lls is
dev
elop
ed w
hich
incl
udes
: a)
asse
ssm
ent o
f cu
rren
t ski
lls in
iden
tifie
d ho
me,
scho
ol a
nd c
omm
unity
set
tings
; b)
iden
tific
atio
n of
ada
ptat
ions
and
sup
port
nee
ded
to f
unc-
tion
in th
ose
setti
ngs;
c)
proc
edur
es f
or w
orki
ng w
ith s
choo
l sta
ff a
nd f
amili
es to
inco
rpor
ate
soci
al s
kill
trai
ning
and
/or
prac
tice
into
sch
ool a
nd f
amily
rou
tines
.
CU
RR
ICU
LU
M P
LA
NN
ING
18.
The
sch
ool's
cur
ricu
la a
re d
evel
oped
by
teac
hers
/sta
ff, s
tude
nts,
par
ents
, adm
inis
trat
ors,
and
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs a
nd id
entif
y ag
e-ap
prop
riat
e co
nten
t (e.
g.. l
angu
age
arts
, mat
h, h
isto
ry,
soci
al/e
mot
iona
l, ar
ts, h
ealth
) an
d pr
oces
s or
ient
ed (
prob
lem
sol
ving
and
col
labo
ratio
n sk
ills,
stud
y sk
ills)
goa
ls a
nd o
bjec
tives
whi
ch p
rom
ote
mea
ning
ful p
artic
ipat
ion
in a
ge-a
ppro
pria
teac
tiviti
es in
hom
e, r
ecre
atio
nal,
educ
atio
nal,
wor
k an
d ot
her
aspe
cts
of c
omm
unity
life
, set
ahi
gh s
tand
ard
of e
xcel
lenc
e an
d ad
dres
s th
e ne
eds
of a
ll st
uden
ts.
19. A
var
iety
of
age-
appr
opri
ate
non-
scho
ol in
stru
ctio
nal s
ettin
gs (
e.g.
, day
care
set
tings
, the
stud
ent's
hom
e, lo
cal s
tore
s, a
nd jo
b si
tes)
are
ava
ilabl
e to
stu
dent
s an
d m
atch
ed to
indi
vidu
alne
eds
for
lear
ning
new
ski
lls o
r fo
r ge
nera
lizin
g sk
ills
to n
ew s
ettin
gs.
20.
The
pro
cess
for
iden
tifyi
ng c
urri
culu
m c
onte
nt f
or a
n in
divi
dual
stu
dent
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in b
asic
ski
ll an
d/or
sod
a) a
reas
incl
udes
an
anal
ysis
of
the
stud
ent's
ski
lls a
nd in
tere
sts
and
of th
e ag
e-ap
prop
riat
e ac
tiviti
es, s
kills
and
ada
ptat
ions
nee
ded
for
the
stud
ent t
o fu
nctio
n in
spec
ific
hom
e, s
choo
l, w
ork,
rec
reat
ion
and
othe
r co
mm
unity
set
tings
.
21.
Obj
ectiv
es f
or s
tude
nts
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in b
asic
ski
ll an
d/or
soc
ial a
reas
spe
cify
cri
teri
aw
hich
incl
ude
perf
orm
ance
in th
e st
uden
t's h
ome,
sch
ool a
nd o
ther
age
-app
ropr
iate
com
mu-
nity
set
tings
.
S P
T
[71
S .P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
P T
110
S =
Sys
tem
sP
= P
olic
y or
Pro
cedu
res
T =
Tra
inin
g
frei
![Page 101: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
,1
1. 2
Bes
t Pra
ctic
e Se
lect
ion
Wor
kshe
etB
est P
ract
ice
Gui
delin
es F
or M
eetin
g T
he N
eeds
Of
All
Stud
ents
In
Loc
al S
choo
ls
22.
Stud
ents
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in b
asic
ski
ll an
d/or
soc
ial a
reas
hav
e pa
id w
ork
expe
rien
ces
inin
tegr
ated
com
mun
ity s
ettin
gs p
rior
to le
avin
g sc
hool
.
23.
The
sys
tem
for
mon
itori
ng th
e pr
ogre
ss o
f st
uden
ts w
ith in
tens
ive
need
s in
bas
ic s
kill
and/
orso
cial
are
as in
clud
es: a
) in
dica
tions
of
leve
l of
inde
pend
ence
on
iden
tifie
d sk
ills/
activ
ities
:b)
indi
catio
ns o
f en
vim
nmen
ts in
whi
ch th
ose
skill
s/ac
tiviti
es h
ave
been
dem
onst
rate
d: c
) an
annu
al s
umm
ary;
and
d)
post
sch
ool f
ollo
w u
ps f
or p
urpo
ses
of p
rogr
am im
prov
emen
t.
DE
LIV
ER
Y O
F IN
STR
UC
TIO
NA
L S
UPP
OR
T S
ER
VIC
ES
24.
Inst
ruct
iona
l sup
port
ser
vice
s an
d st
aff
(e.g
.. C
hapt
er 1
. spe
cial
edu
catio
n, s
peec
h an
d la
n-gu
age,
gui
danc
e, p
eer
tuto
ring
) ar
e in
corp
orat
ed in
to o
ngoi
ng s
choo
l and
com
mun
ity a
ctiv
ities
.
25.
The
dec
isio
n to
pul
l any
stu
dent
out
of
ongo
ing
scho
ol o
r co
mm
unity
act
iviti
es to
rec
eive
supp
ort s
ervi
ces
is a
team
dec
isio
n ba
sed
upon
doc
umen
tatio
n th
at th
e st
uden
t's n
eeds
cou
ldno
t be
achi
eved
thro
ugh
the
use
of s
uppl
emen
tary
aid
s an
d se
rvic
es in
the
clas
sroo
m. T
his
deci
sion
is n
ot b
ased
upo
n st
aff
pref
eren
ces.
'
26.
For
stud
ents
with
nee
ds (
e.g.
, cou
nsel
ing,
com
mun
ity-b
ased
trai
ning
, med
ical
) w
hich
can
not
be m
et th
roug
h on
goin
g ac
tiviti
es, p
ull o
ut is
sch
edul
ed d
urin
g ac
tiviti
es w
hich
the
team
dete
rmin
es to
be
low
est p
rior
ity f
or th
e st
uden
t.
27.
The
del
iver
y of
inst
ruct
iona
l sup
port
ser
vice
s (e
.g..
cons
ulta
tion,
trai
ning
, tec
hnic
al a
ssis
tanc
e,co
oper
ativ
e pl
ann:
ng w
ith s
uppo
rt s
taff
, tea
m te
achi
ng w
ith s
uppo
rt s
taff
, sup
port
sta
ff d
eliv
-er
ing
dire
ct s
ervi
ces
in th
e cl
assr
oom
, rel
ease
tim
e fo
r pl
anni
ng, a
cces
s to
inst
ruct
iona
l sup
-po
rt te
ams)
incl
udes
sup
port
to te
ache
rs, t
each
ing
assi
stan
ts, v
olun
teer
s, a
nd o
ther
dir
ect
inst
ruct
iona
l sta
ff.
IND
IVID
UA
LIZ
ED
IN
STR
UC
TIO
N
28.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
all s
tude
nts
with
opp
ortu
nitie
s to
set
per
sona
l goa
ls a
nd to
pla
n, w
ithpa
rent
s an
d te
ache
rs, h
ow th
eir
goal
s w
ill b
e ad
dres
sed
duri
ng th
e sc
hool
yea
r.
29.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
staf
f to
bec
ome
prof
icie
nt a
t pre
view
ing
inst
ruct
iona
lac
tiviti
es, g
ivin
g cl
ear
wri
tten
and
verb
al d
irec
tions
, che
ckin
g fo
r st
uden
t und
erst
andi
ng a
ndgi
ving
stu
dent
s co
nstr
uctiv
e fe
edba
ck a
nd p
ositi
ve r
einf
orce
men
t.
Page
41
S =
Sys
tem
sP
= P
olic
y or
Pro
cedu
res
T =
Tra
inin
g
Sele
cted
(Ila
nges
Prio
rity
(se
Box
)N
eede
d(1
= H
ighe
st)
S P
T
IJS
P T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
![Page 102: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
Bes
t Pra
ctic
e Se
lect
ion
Wor
kshe
etB
est P
ract
ice
Gui
delin
es F
or M
eetin
g T
he N
eeds
Of
All
Stud
ents
In
Loc
al S
choo
ls
30.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
staf
f to
bec
ome
prof
icie
nt in
usi
ng a
var
iety
of
in-
stru
ctio
nal m
etho
ds (
e.g.
, coo
pera
tive
lear
ning
, who
le la
ngua
ge, p
eer
tuto
ring
, dri
ll an
d pr
ac-
tice,
inci
dent
al te
achi
ng. c
ompu
ter-
assi
sted
inst
ruct
ion)
, mat
chin
g m
etho
ds to
indi
vidu
alst
uden
t nee
ds, a
nd in
corp
orat
ing
met
hods
into
ong
oing
act
iviti
es.
31. A
var
iety
of
inst
ruct
iona
l gro
upin
gs (
e.g.
, sm
all g
roup
. lar
ge g
roup
, mul
ti-ag
ed g
roup
s. c
oop-
erat
ive
grou
p, in
divi
dual
inst
ruct
ion)
is a
vaila
ble
to a
ll st
uden
ts a
nd m
atch
ed to
indi
vidu
alst
uden
t nee
ds.
32. A
var
iety
of
inst
ruct
ors
(e.g
., te
ache
m te
ache
r as
sist
ants
, sam
e-ag
e pe
er tu
tors
, cro
ss-a
ge p
eer
tuto
rs, p
eer
men
tors
, vol
unte
ers)
are
ava
ilabl
e to
stu
dent
s an
d m
atch
ed to
indi
vidu
al s
tude
ntne
eds.
33.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
staf
f to
bec
ome
prof
icie
nt a
t usi
ng a
var
iety
of
in-
stru
ctio
nal m
ater
ials
(e.
g., r
eal i
tem
s, p
hoto
grap
hs, d
raw
ings
, wor
k sh
eets
, tex
tboo
ks, a
udio
/vi
sual
s), a
t mat
chin
g m
ater
ials
to in
divi
dual
stu
dent
nee
ds, a
nd in
corp
orat
ing
mat
eria
ls in
toon
goin
g ac
tiviti
es.
34.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
staf
f to
bec
ome
prof
icie
nt a
t tea
chin
g se
vera
l dif
fere
ntgo
als
from
the
sam
e cu
rric
ulum
are
a th
roug
h a
sing
le g
roup
act
ivity
(e.
g.. d
urin
g a
grou
pm
ath
activ
ity s
ome
stud
ents
may
be
lear
ning
add
ition
whi
le o
ther
s ar
e le
arni
ng c
ount
ing
oron
e-to
-one
cor
resp
onde
nce)
.
35.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
staf
f to
bec
ome
prof
icie
nt a
t tea
chin
g go
als
from
diff
eren
t cur
ricu
lum
are
as th
roug
h th
e sa
me
grou
p ac
tivity
(e.
g.. d
urin
g a
grou
p so
cial
stu
dies
activ
ity s
ome
stud
ents
may
hav
e a
prim
ary
goal
of
lear
ning
t. c
soc
ial s
tudi
es c
onte
nt w
hile
othe
rs h
ave
prim
ary
goal
s of
lear
ning
lang
uage
. com
mun
icat
ion)
.
36.
The
-xh
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
staf
f an
d st
uden
ts to
bec
ome
prof
icie
nt a
t ide
ntif
ying
a va
riet
y of
way
s st
uden
ts c
an a
cqui
re o
r de
mon
stra
te s
kills
/kno
wle
dge
(e.g
., si
gnin
g. w
rilin
g,ty
ping
, ges
turi
ng, o
ral t
ests
or
repo
rts,
art
dis
play
s. ta
ped
pres
enta
tions
), m
atch
ing
them
toin
divi
dual
stu
dent
nee
ds, a
nd in
corp
orat
ing
them
into
ong
oing
act
iviti
es.
37.
For
each
less
on c
urre
ntly
bei
ng ta
ught
, the
re is
a w
ritte
n in
stru
ctio
nal p
rogr
am o
r le
sson
pla
nw
hich
is a
vaila
ble
to a
ll di
rect
inst
ruct
iona
l sta
ff.
38.
Stud
ent p
rogr
ess
is m
onito
red
and
anal
yzed
on
a re
gula
rly
sche
dule
d ba
sis.
S =
Sys
tem
sP
= P
olic
y or
Pro
cedu
res
T =
Tra
inin
g
14
Sele
cted
(1/ B
ox)
Cha
nges
Prio
rity
Nee
ded
(1 =
Hig
hest
)
S P
T
El
El
S P
T
S P
T
S P
TE
l
El
S P
T
S P
T
El
S P
T
El
S P
T
Page
t 5
![Page 103: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
1 c;
Bes
t Pra
ctic
e Se
lect
ion
Wor
kshe
etB
est P
ract
ice
Gui
delin
es F
or M
eetin
g T
he N
eeds
Of
All
Stud
ents
In
Loc
al S
choo
ls
39.
Dec
isio
ns to
mod
ify
inst
ruct
iona
l gro
upin
gs, m
etho
ds o
r m
ater
ials
are
base
d up
on m
easu
res
of s
tude
nt p
rogr
ess.
40. A
cur
rent
sch
edul
e of
dai
ly s
tude
nt a
ctiv
ities
whi
chde
scri
bes
wha
t is
bein
g do
ne, w
hen,
and
with
who
m. I
s av
aila
ble
and
read
ily a
cces
sibl
e.
TR
.API
SIT
ION
PL
AN
NIN
G
41.
Mer
e ar
e pr
oced
ures
for
fac
ilita
ting
the
smoo
th tr
ansi
tion
of a
llst
uden
ts f
rom
ene
-edi
rca-
tiona
l set
ting
to a
noth
er, a
nd f
rom
sch
ool t
o po
st-s
choo
l lif
e.
42. A
wri
tten
plan
for
tran
sitio
ning
eac
h st
uden
t with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds.
incl
udin
g st
uden
ts w
hoar
e gi
fted
, fro
m o
ne e
duca
tiona
l set
ting
toan
othe
r is
dev
elop
ed a
nd im
plem
ente
d in
adv
ance
of th
e m
ove
(e.g
., 6
to 9
mon
ths)
.
43.
For
high
sch
ool a
ged
stud
ents
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds,
a w
ritte
ngr
adua
tion
plan
for
tran
sitio
nto
pos
t sch
ool l
ife
(e.g
., em
ploy
men
t, ed
ucat
ion,
rec
reat
ion,
resi
dent
ial)
Ls
deve
lope
d an
dim
plem
ente
d w
ell i
n ad
vanc
e of
the
tran
sitio
n (e
.g..
at a
ge f
ourt
een)
and
rev
iew
edan
nual
ly.
FAM
ILY
-SC
HO
OL
CO
LL
AB
OR
AT
ION
44.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
fam
ilies
with
the
free
dom
to v
isit
the
scho
ol a
nd to
com
mun
icat
e re
gu-
larl
y w
ith s
choo
l sta
ff o
n to
pics
impo
rtan
t to
both
the
fam
ily a
nd th
esc
hool
.
45.
The
re is
info
rmat
ion
avai
labl
e to
fam
ilies
whi
ch a
ssis
ts th
em to
acc
ess
info
rmal
supp
ort
netw
orks
and
con
nect
with
com
mun
ity r
esou
rces
(e.
g., d
ayca
re p
rogr
ams,
rec
reat
ion
pro-
gram
s, c
ouns
elin
g, r
espi
te c
are,
voc
atio
nal r
ehab
ilita
tion,
men
tal h
ealth
).
46.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
fam
ilies
with
opp
ortu
nitie
s fo
r co
nsul
tatio
n, tr
aini
ng a
ndfo
llow
-up
from
scho
ol s
taff
to m
axim
ize
thei
r ch
ildre
n's
deve
lopm
ent i
n ho
me
and
othe
r co
mm
unity
setti
ngs.
47.
Fam
ilies
are
incl
uded
in a
dvis
ory,
dec
isio
n-m
akin
g, a
nd a
dvoc
acy
activ
ities
of th
e sc
hool
(e.g
., ad
viso
ry c
omm
ittee
s, c
urri
culu
m c
omm
ittee
s, d
evel
opm
ent o
f th
esc
hool
phi
loso
phy
and
clim
ate,
sch
ool p
lann
ing
team
s, s
taff
dev
elop
men
t com
mitt
ees)
.
48.
Fam
ilies
are
incl
uded
in th
e de
cisi
on m
akin
g pr
oces
s to
det
erm
ine
the
high
pri
ority
educ
a-tio
nal n
eeds
of
thei
r ch
ildre
n, a
nd h
ow a
nd w
here
(sc
hool
, hom
e, o
r co
mm
unity
setti
ngs)
thei
r ch
ildr,
will
be
taug
ht.
49.
Inst
ruct
iona
l pla
nnin
g in
clud
es p
roce
dure
s fo
r as
sist
ing
fam
ilies
to in
corp
orat
e in
stru
ctio
nan
d/or
pra
ctic
e of
ski
lls in
to o
ngoi
ng h
ome
and
com
mun
ity a
ctiv
ities
.
Ppge
6S
= S
yste
ms
P =
Pol
icy
or P
roce
dure
sT
= T
rain
ing
Sele
cted
Cha
nges
Prio
rity
(i B
ox)
Nee
ded
(1 =
Hig
hest
)
S P
T
S P
TE
l
El
El
El
ElS
P T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
TE
lS
P T
El
El
ElS
P T
S P
T
![Page 104: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
Bes
t Pra
ctic
e Se
lect
ion
Wor
kshe
etB
est P
ract
ice
Gui
delin
es F
or M
eetin
g T
he N
eeds
Of
All
Stud
ents
In
Loc
al S
choo
lsSe
lect
edC
hang
esPr
iori
ty(1
Box
)N
eede
d(1
= H
ighe
st)
PLA
NN
ING
FO
R C
ON
TIN
UE
D B
EST
PR
AC
TIC
E I
MPR
OV
EM
EN
T
50. A
pla
n fo
r im
prov
ing
best
pra
ctic
e-ba
sed
serv
ices
with
in th
e sc
hool
is d
evel
oped
eve
ry th
ree
tofi
ve y
ears
by
a sc
hool
pla
nnin
g te
am c
onsi
stin
g of
adm
inis
trat
ors,
sta
ff, s
tude
nts,
par
ents
.sc
hool
boa
rd m
embe
rs a
nd o
ther
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs.
51.
The
sch
ool's
pla
n in
clud
es: a
) a
revi
ew o
f th
e sc
hool
's g
oals
and
the
exte
nt to
whi
ch g
oals
and
best
edu
catio
nal p
ract
ices
are
ach
ieve
d; b
) an
exa
min
atio
n of
ser
vice
s of
fere
d by
the
scho
olan
d ho
w th
ey r
elat
e to
stu
dent
, fam
ily, a
nd c
omm
unity
nee
ds; c
) fo
llow
-up
mea
sure
s of
stud
ents
' per
form
ance
in th
e ne
xt s
choo
l set
ting
or p
ost s
choo
l set
tings
: and
d)
activ
ities
and
timel
ines
for
impr
ovin
g be
st p
ract
ices
.
52.
The
sch
ool p
lann
ing
team
mee
ts p
erio
dica
lly to
mon
itor
prog
ress
on
impl
emen
ting
the
scho
ol's
plan
and
to m
ake
nece
ssar
y ad
just
men
ts in
act
iviti
es a
nd ti
mel
ines
for
ach
ievi
ng th
e pl
an.
53.
The
sch
ool's
pla
n an
d su
bseq
uent
rep
orts
of
prog
ress
in im
plem
entin
g th
e pl
an a
re d
isse
mi-
nate
d to
par
ents
, sch
ool d
istr
ict s
taff
and
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs.
54.
The
re is
a p
erio
dic
eval
uatio
n of
the
plan
ning
pro
cess
by
scho
ol s
taff
, stu
dent
s, p
aren
ts,
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs a
nd p
erso
ns f
rom
out
side
of
the
scho
ol (
e.g.
, sta
ff f
rom
oth
er s
choo
ls,
colle
ges
and
univ
ersi
ties,
sta
te a
nd lo
cal g
over
nmen
t).
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
S P
T
Com
men
ts:
S =
Sys
tem
sP
= P
olic
y or
Pro
cedu
res
T =
Tra
inin
g
118
1 ?l
ag 7
![Page 105: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
Action Plan
AreaBest Practice Statement:
Changes in Service Delivery(Systems Change)
Changes in Policies or Procedures(Policy Change)
Training Needs(Staff, Students. Community)
1 Z
![Page 106: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
( Systems Chan e Summary Sheet )School Date
Proposed .
SystemsChange
BestPracticesImpacted
Steps toInitiateChange
Person(s)Responsible
ProjectedCompletionDate
_
![Page 107: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
( Policy Change Summary SheetSchool Date
Proposed Best Steps to ProjectedPolicy/Procedure Practices Initiate Person(s) CompletionChange Impacted Change Responsible Date
![Page 108: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
School Date
TrainingObjective
BestPracticesImpacted
AudienceandTrainers
TimeLocationFormat
ExpectedOutcomes
ProjectedCompletionDate
![Page 109: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
Appenaix B
Forms for Completing the
Individual StudentPlanning Team Process
N
124
![Page 110: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
Team Management Plan
Student
Core Planning Team Members
Year
Position
Extended Planning Team Members Position Info. Backup
When will the the Team meet during the school year?
Core Team:Day of WeekTimeWeekly 0Every Other Week 0Other
Extended Team:Day of WeekTimeWeekly 0Every Other Week 0Monthly 0Other
If additional meetings (core or extended) are needed who will be responsible for ar-ranging them?
If the student or his/her parents cannot attend meetings, how will the team keepthem informed and solicit their input?
Who is the primary parent contact person?
If a teaching assistant is assigned, who is primarily responsible for supervising theassistant?
Who is primarily responsible for monitoring the student's:
physical management needs?behavior management strategies?social integration strategies?transitions between activities/classes?
0
![Page 111: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
-;
Team Meeting Worksheet
Student
Team Members Present
Date
Team Members Absent Information Backup
Roles: For This Meeting For Next MeetingFacilitatorRecorderTimekeeperEncourager
Agenda for This Meeting Time Limit1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Agenda for the Next Meeting Next Meeting Date1.
2.
3.
4
![Page 112: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
TaskPerson(s) Completed
Responsible By (Date)
![Page 113: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
Team Date
Team doals
Why are we meeting? What do we hope to accomplisñ as a team?What is Me focus of our planning?
My Individual Goals
Why am I a member of this team? What do I hope to accomplish as a team member? How can Iimprove myseff through this everience? What can I offer to the team?
128
![Page 114: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
Team Member Checklist
Name Date
0 I contributed my ideas.
0 I encouraged others to contribute their ideas.
LI I listened to and evressed support and acceptance ofother's ideas.
0 I evressed nty feelings.
0 I offered my personal- and professional- resources tosupport the team.
0 I asked for clarification and help when needed.
0 I helped the group keep working.
0 I maintained a sense of humor.
0 I recorded group and individual tasks.
0 I enjoyed myself.
My Personal Goals
1 9
![Page 115: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
(Adapting the Student Planning Process )1 Tuks to be completed. Cross out tasks which the team will not
complete. List additional tuks the team will complete.
Task 1 Establish the Planning Teama. Student Assigned to Age-appropriate Classes
b. Identify Team Membership C3
c. Facilitation of Family Participation on the Student's Team ri
d. Development of Teaming Procedures CI
Task 2 Identify Fundamental Values, the Student's Strengths,Best Practice Needs and Skills to be Taught
Identify Fundamental Values 0Identify Students Strengths and Educational Needs 0
Identify Skill Areas to Be Taught 0Identify Best Practice Needs 0
Task 3 Complete the Activity Matrix 0
Task 4 Determine Support Tasks 0
Task 5 Monitor Progress and Evaluate the Availability ofBest Practices to the Student's Program
Monitor Progress 0
Evaluate Best Practice Availability 0
Task 6 Transition to Next Grade 0
![Page 116: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
C Fundamental Values )Student Date
Each of the value areas fisted &tow stwutd be an integral' part of every student's educational everience.We wilt attempt to insure that the selected value areas are incorporated into every activity and
everiente that the student engages in as a part of his educational. program.
Select (1) Up to Three Value Areas Which are of Particular Importance to This Student:
Academics Comments:
Social Acceptance/Friendships 13 Conunaus:
Health/Safety 0 Comments:
Self Concept/Self Esteem 0 comment,
Choice Making 1:3
r
Comments:
Self Control/Self Management 0 Comments:
Inclusion in Integrated Activities 0 COMMCIUS:
Other (Specify):
![Page 117: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
( Student Assessment Worksheet )Student Date
Areas To Be Person(s) To BeAssessed Responsible Completed By
Review of Records
Interviews (specify instrument)Parents -
Current Teachers (list persons and instruments)1.
.
..
Past Teachers (list persons and specify instruments)1.
.
.
Others (list persons and specify instruments)1.
.
Observational AssessmentsElicited (list specific instruments)1.2.3.4.5.Non-elicitedClassroom 0Cafeteria 0Playground 0Home 0Other (list)1.
2.Training-Based Assessments (describe):
132
![Page 118: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
( Skill Areas To Be Taught )
J
Student DateCompleted byNext Major Transition(s)
Basic Communication
[show preferences, indicate more, indicate rejection/protest, indicatewants/needs, initiate socially, respond to social intitations, participate inturn taking, make choices other:
Language[follow directions, receptive vocabulary, expressive vocabulary, length ofutterance, articulation, categories, relational concepts, temporalrelations, opposites other:
Social Relationships/Self Management
1
aprosocial skills (e.g., participation, know feelings, offer assistance,salutations, questioning, praise, cooperative, work/study habits, deai withnger, use self control, follow rules, avoid trouble, say no, make a decision,
solve problems), relate information, quality of communication, eyecontact, facial expressions, posture, interpersonal distance, physicalappearance, hygiene, physical contact, social anonymity, family life, followpersonal schedule, create schedule other:
PriorityDomain
PriorityDomain
Motor(oral motor, posture/position, prehension, pointing, manipulation,mobility other:
Reading
PriorityDomain
[N Prioritysurvival words, signs or labels, schedules, maps, listings, illustrated Domainadvertisements, instructions, forms, books, word attack skills, formalreading programs other: 0
...._____./Writing
hold pencil, color, trace, copy, write single letters, write numbers,write words, write thoughts, write paragraphs, write stories, bookreports, research reports othen
PriorityDomain
11
![Page 119: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
( Skill Areas To Be Taugg)Math
one/many, one-to-one-correspondence, equivalence, more or less, countobjects, count by rote, identify/label numerals, order numerals, count bymultiples, tell time, money, add, subtract, multiply, divide, formal mathprograms other:
Personal Careeat, toilet, take off clothes, put on clothes, select clothing, store clothingafter use, wash hands and face, bathe, shower, wash hair, blow dry hair,comb hair, use barber/beauty shop, shave face/legs/underarms, menstrual.are othen
Safetyrespond to emergencies, community orientation, communitymobility, playground safety, poisons, strangers, lost other:
Dining/Food(plan meals, prepare meals, set and clear table, wash and dry dishes, fast
food restaurant, sit down restaurant, cafeteria, bag lunch, vendingrnachines, snack shop, street vender other:
Clothing Care(automatic washing machine, coin operated machine, hand wash clothing,
automatic clothes dryer, coin operated dryer, line dry, fold clothing, iron\clothing, store clothing, dry clean other:
Home Care(straighten rooms, dust rooms, sweep/mop floors, vacuum, wet mop, wash
windows, clean bathroom, clean kitchen, wash windows, take out trash,recycle, make bed, change linens, water, mow lawns, rake,.I_Lovel snow other:
PriorityDomain
PriontyDomain
PriorityDomain
PriorityDomain
PriorityDomain
El
![Page 120: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
C Skill Areas To Be Taught
Money Management
budget, pay bills by mail, pay bills in person, checking account, savingsaccount, cash card other:
School Inclusionteacher directed small groups, teacher directed large groups, studentdirected small groups, cooperative groups, independent work, peertutoring, computer use, cafeteria use, library use, free time/recess,ext.a-curricular activities, school jobs, school mobilityother:
Vocational[apply for work, regular work routine, payday work routine, specific jobs
other:
Recreationexercise, games, crafts and hobbies, sports, events (dance, communityevents), spectator activities (play, sports), communication activities(phones friends, hanging out), mini day trips (park, mall, zoo)other:
COMMENTS
PriorityDomain
PriorityDomain
PriorityDomain
PriorityDomain
![Page 121: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
BE
ST P
RA
CT
ICE
CH
EC
KL
IST
FOR
IND
IVID
UA
L S
TU
DE
NT
S
TO
BE
CO
MPL
ET
ED
PR
IOR
TO
DE
VE
LO
PIN
GT
HE
ST
UD
EN
T'S
PL
AN
I
Part
ID
eter
min
e im
port
ance
of
each
bes
t pra
ctic
e to
the
deve
lopm
ent o
f th
e st
uden
t's p
rogr
am.
Nea
r th
e be
ginn
ing
of th
e st
uden
t pla
nnin
g pr
oces
s,th
e te
am s
houl
d co
mpl
ete
Part
I o
f th
e ch
eckl
ist b
ych
eck-
ing
the
boxe
s in
the
firs
t col
umn
title
d "I
mpo
rtan
t to
Stud
ent's
Pro
gram
" fo
r ea
ch b
est p
ract
ice
whi
ch th
e te
amde
term
ines
to b
e of
par
ticul
ar im
port
ance
for
dev
elop
ing
the
stud
ent's
edu
catio
nal p
lan.
Ite
ms
chec
ked
shou
ld b
ein
corp
orat
ed in
the
stud
ent's
edu
catio
nal p
lan
and/
or s
yste
mfo
r su
ppor
ting
the
stud
ent a
nd h
er f
amily
.i
TO
BE
CO
MPL
ET
ED
AFT
ER
TH
E S
TU
DE
NT
'SPL
AN
HA
S B
EE
N I
MPL
EM
EN
TE
D
Part
II
Det
erm
ine
if e
ach
impo
rtan
t bes
t pra
ctic
e (t
hose
pre
viou
sly
chec
ked
in P
art I
) w
as a
dequ
atel
iI
inco
rpor
ated
into
the
stud
ent's
pro
gram
.
Aft
er th
e st
uden
t's p
rogr
am h
as b
een
impl
emen
ted,
the
team
revi
ews
Part
I a
nd c
ompl
etes
Par
t II
of th
ech
eckl
ist.
The
team
sho
uld
chec
k ea
ch b
ox in
col
umn
two,
"Pra
ctic
e N
ot A
dequ
atel
y In
corp
orat
ed I
nto
Stud
ent's
Pro
gram
", f
or th
ose
prac
tices
whi
ch w
ere
chec
ked
asim
port
ant d
urin
g Pa
rt I
and
whi
ch th
e te
amco
uld
not a
dequ
atel
y in
corp
orat
e in
to th
e st
uden
ts e
duca
tiona
lpl
an o
r sy
stem
for
sup
port
ing
the
stud
ent o
r he
rfa
mily
.
Part
III
Mak
e R
ecom
men
datio
ns f
or im
prov
ing
the
avai
labi
lity
ofpr
actic
es im
port
ant t
o th
e st
uden
t.
For
thos
e pr
actic
es c
heck
ed in
Par
t II,
the
team
sho
uld
gene
rate
reco
mm
enda
tions
for
mak
ing
them
ava
ilabl
eto
the
stud
ent.
Rec
omm
enda
tions
sho
uld
be g
iven
toth
e Sc
hool
Pla
nnin
g T
eam
to in
corp
orat
e in
act
ion
plan
s fo
rim
prov
ing
best
pra
ctic
es f
or a
ll st
uden
ts w
ithin
the
scho
ol.
17
4
![Page 122: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
1 ...
)
BE
ST P
RA
CT
ICE
CH
EC
KL
IST
FO
R I
ND
IVID
UA
L S
TU
DE
NT
S
Stud
ent
Dat
e (P
art I
)D
ate
(Par
t II
& I
II)
Impo
rtan
tto
Stu
dent
'sPr
ogra
m
Prac
tice
Not
Ade
auat
ely
Inco
rpor
ated
into
Stud
ent's
Pro
gram
SCH
OO
L C
LIM
AT
E A
ND
ST
RU
CT
UR
E
1.T
he s
choo
l's p
hilo
soph
y st
atem
ent a
nd o
bjec
tives
are
dev
elop
ed b
y ad
min
istr
ator
s, s
taff
, stu
dent
s,pa
rent
s, s
choo
l boa
rd m
embe
rs a
nd o
ther
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs a
nd r
efle
ct th
e sc
hool
's c
omm
itmen
t to
mee
ting
the
indi
vidu
al n
eeds
of
all s
tude
nts
in a
ge-a
ppro
pria
te r
egul
ar e
duca
tion
and
com
mun
ityse
tting
s.
2.T
he s
choo
l's c
limat
e is
est
ablis
hed
by a
dmin
istr
ator
s, s
taff
, stu
dent
s, p
aren
ts, s
choo
l boa
rd m
embe
rs a
ndot
her
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs a
nd p
rom
otes
res
pect
for
indi
vidu
al d
iffe
renc
es a
mon
g st
uden
ts, e
ncou
rage
sth
e de
velo
pmen
t of
posi
tive
self
-est
eem
, est
ablis
hes
high
ach
ieve
men
t exp
ecta
tions
for
all
stud
ents
, and
enco
urag
es th
e de
velo
pmen
t of
cari
ng p
erso
nal r
elat
ions
hips
am
ong
stud
ents
and
sta
ff.
3.T
he s
choo
l's c
ode
of c
ondu
ct f
or s
tude
nts
and
staf
f is
est
ablis
hed
by a
dmin
istr
ator
s, s
taff
, stu
dent
s,pa
rent
s, s
choo
l boa
rd m
embe
rs a
nd o
ther
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs, e
mph
asiz
es p
ositi
ve b
ehav
ior,
isap
plie
d in
a c
onsi
sten
t, fa
ir m
anne
r, a
nd ta
kes
into
acc
ount
the
uniq
ue n
eeds
of
indi
vidu
al s
tude
nts.
4.T
he s
choo
l pro
vide
s am
ple
oppo
rtun
ities
for
stu
dent
s, s
taff
, adm
inis
trat
ors,
par
ents
, sch
ool b
oard
mem
bers
and
oth
er c
omm
unity
mem
bers
to b
e re
cogn
ized
for
thei
r ac
com
plis
hmen
ts, i
nclu
ding
hel
ping
othe
rs.
5.T
he g
ener
al r
oles
and
res
pons
ibili
ties
of a
ll sc
hool
sta
ff (
incl
udin
g co
ntra
cted
sta
ff s
uch
as a
n oc
cupa
-tio
nal t
hera
pist
or
psyc
holo
gist
) re
lativ
e to
pro
vidi
ng in
stru
ctio
n an
d su
ppor
t to
all s
tude
nts
are
clea
rly
delin
eate
d by
adm
inis
trat
ors,
sta
ff, s
tude
nts,
par
ents
, sch
ool b
oard
mem
bers
and
oth
er c
omm
unity
mem
bers
.
6.T
he s
choo
l's p
rofe
ssio
nal d
evel
opm
ent p
roce
ss is
dev
elop
ed b
y ad
min
istr
ator
s, s
taff
, stu
dent
s, p
aren
ts,
scho
ol b
oard
mem
bers
and
oth
er c
omm
unity
mem
bers
and
incl
udes
inse
rvic
e tr
aini
ng, r
egul
arly
sche
dule
d ob
serv
atio
ns w
ith f
eedb
ack,
tech
nica
l ass
ista
nce,
pee
r co
achi
ng, a
nd m
ento
ring
.
7.T
he s
choo
l's in
stru
ctio
nal s
uppo
rt s
yste
m (
e.g.
, cla
ssro
om-b
ased
mod
el f
or d
eliv
erin
g su
ppor
t ser
vice
s,te
ache
r as
sist
ance
team
, ind
ivid
ual s
tude
nt p
lann
ing
team
s, s
peci
al e
duca
tion
pre-
refe
rral
pro
cess
,vo
lunt
eer
syst
em)
is d
evel
oped
by
adm
inis
trat
ors,
sta
ff, s
tude
nts,
par
ents
, sch
ool b
oard
mem
bers
and
othe
r co
mm
unity
mem
bers
and
is a
vaila
ble
to a
ll st
uden
ts a
nd s
taff
.
Part
I
El
El
Part
II
El
![Page 123: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
BE
ST P
RA
CT
ICE
CH
EC
KL
IST
FO
R I
ND
IVID
UA
L S
TU
DE
NT
S
CO
LL
AB
OR
AT
IVE
PL
AN
NIN
G
8.T
he s
choo
l pro
vide
s op
port
uniti
es f
or s
taff
, stu
dent
s, f
amily
mem
bers
, and
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs to
beco
me
prof
icie
nt a
t fun
ctio
ning
in a
col
labo
rativ
e m
anne
r (i
.e.,
shar
e re
spon
sibi
lity
and
reso
urce
s, m
ake
deci
sion
s by
con
sens
us, u
se a
str
uctu
red
mee
ting
agen
da f
orm
at, r
otat
e te
am r
oles
of
faci
litat
or,
timek
eepe
r an
d re
cord
er).
9.T
he s
choo
l pro
vide
s tim
e du
ring
sch
ool h
ours
for
inst
ruct
iona
l sup
port
team
s (e
.g.,
indi
vidu
al s
tude
ntpl
anni
ng te
ams,
teac
her
assi
stan
ce te
ams,
teac
hing
team
s) to
mee
t and
for
indi
vidu
al te
am m
embe
rs to
mon
itor
serv
ices
, and
to p
rovi
de ti
mel
y co
nsul
tatio
n, s
uppo
rt a
nd te
chni
cal a
ssis
tanc
e to
fam
ilies
and
staf
f.
10.
For
stud
ents
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in b
asic
ski
ll an
d/or
soc
ial s
kill
area
s or
who
are
cha
lleng
ed b
y th
eir
gift
s an
d ta
lent
s, in
divi
dual
stu
dent
pla
nnin
g te
ams
are
conv
ened
whi
ch a
re r
espo
nsib
le f
or th
e de
velo
p-m
ent a
nd im
plem
enta
tion
of a
ll as
pect
s of
the
stud
ent's
edu
catio
nal p
rogr
am (
e.g.
, stu
dent
goa
ls,s
tude
ntsc
hedu
les,
pro
cedu
res
to a
ddre
ss le
arni
ng/b
ehav
ior/
man
agem
ent i
ssue
s, tr
ansi
tion
plan
s, s
trat
egie
s to
supp
ort t
he s
tude
nt a
nd h
is/h
er te
ache
rs a
nd f
amily
).
11.
I nd
ivid
ual
stu
dent
pla
nnin
g te
ams
cons
ist o
f th
e st
udfa
mily
mem
bers
, the
stu
dent
's g
ener
al c
lass
teac
her(
s) a
nd o
ther
app
ropr
iate
per
sons
bas
ed u
pon
the
stud
ent's
nee
ds (
e.g.
, pri
ncip
al, C
hapt
er I
teac
her,
mus
ic te
ache
r, p
hysi
cal t
hera
pist
, one
or
two
of th
e st
uden
t's p
eers
, tea
chin
g as
sist
ant,
spec
ial
educ
ator
, soc
ial w
orke
r, r
epre
sent
ativ
es o
f co
mm
unity
age
ncie
s, f
amily
adv
ocat
es).
12.
The
indi
vidu
al r
oles
of
each
stu
dent
pla
nnin
g te
am m
embe
r, in
clud
ing
rela
ted
serv
ice
prov
ider
s an
dot
her
cons
ulta
nts,
are
spe
cifi
ed b
y th
e te
am a
nd a
re s
uppo
rtiv
e of
the
educ
atio
nal n
eeds
of
the
stud
ent.
SOC
IAL
RE
SPO
NSI
BIL
ITY
13.
The
sch
ool f
acili
tate
s th
e de
velo
pmen
t of
soci
al r
espo
nsib
ility
and
sel
f-re
lianc
e by
pro
mot
ing
stud
ent
part
icip
atio
n in
vol
unte
er o
rgan
izat
ions
and
act
iviti
es (
e.g.
, com
mun
ity s
ervi
ce a
ctiv
ities
, pee
r tu
tori
ng/
men
tori
ng a
ctiv
ities
, stu
dent
gov
ernm
ent,
part
icip
atio
n in
dec
isio
n m
akin
g ab
out i
mpo
rtan
t sch
ool o
rco
mm
unity
issu
es).
14.
The
sch
ool's
cur
ricu
lum
pro
vide
s st
ruct
ured
opp
ortu
nitie
s fo
r st
uden
ts to
lear
n ab
out a
nd a
ppre
ciat
ein
divi
dual
dif
fere
nces
am
ong
peop
le.
15.
The
sch
ool's
cur
ricu
lum
pro
vide
s st
ruct
ured
opp
ortu
nitie
s fo
r st
uden
ts to
dev
elop
app
ropr
iate
soc
ial
skill
s (e
.g.,
mak
ing
frie
nds,
coo
pera
ting
with
oth
ers,
sha
ring
, lis
teni
ng, a
void
ing
figh
ting)
whi
ch in
clud
efr
eque
nt p
ract
ice
duri
ng s
choo
l, ho
me
and
com
mun
ity a
ctiv
ities
.
Impo
rtan
tto
Stu
dent
'sPr
ogra
mPa
rt I
Prac
tice
Not
Ade
wka
telv
Inco
rpor
ated
into
Stud
ent's
Pro
gram
Part
II
Page
140
141
![Page 124: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
,14
BE
ST P
RA
CT
ICE
CH
EC
KL
IST
FO
R I
ND
IVID
UA
L S
TU
DE
NT
SIm
port
ant
to S
tude
nt's
Prog
ram
Prac
tice
Not
Ade
quat
elx
Inco
rpor
ated
into
Stud
ent's
Pro
gram
16.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
stud
ents
to p
artic
ipat
e in
age
-app
ropr
iate
sch
ool s
pons
ored
extr
a-cu
rric
ular
act
iviti
es (
e.g.
, fie
ld tr
ips,
spo
rts
team
s, c
lubs
, dan
ces,
ass
embl
ies,
stu
dent
gov
ernm
ent)
.
17.
For
stud
ents
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in th
e so
cial
ski
ll ar
ea, a
n in
divi
dual
pro
gram
for
incr
easi
ng s
ocia
lsk
ills
is d
evel
oped
whi
ch in
clud
es: a
) as
sess
men
t of
curr
ent s
kills
in id
entif
ied
hom
e, s
choo
l and
com
-m
unity
set
tings
; b)
iden
tific
atio
n of
ada
ptat
ions
and
sup
port
nee
ded
to f
unct
ion
in th
ose
setti
ngs;
c) p
roce
dure
s fo
r w
orki
ng w
ith s
choo
l sta
ff a
nd f
amili
es to
inco
rpor
ate
soci
al s
kill
trai
ning
and/
orpr
actic
e in
to s
choo
l and
fam
ily r
outin
es.
CU
RR
ICU
LU
M P
LA
NN
ING
18.
The
sch
ool's
cur
ricu
la a
re d
evel
oped
by
teac
hers
/sta
ff, s
tude
nts,
par
ents
, adm
inis
trat
ors,
and
com
mu-
nity
mem
bers
and
iden
tify
age-
appr
opri
ate
cont
ent (
e.g.
, lan
guag
e ar
ts, m
ath,
hist
ory,
soc
ial/e
mot
iona
l,ar
ts, h
ealth
) an
d pr
oces
s or
ient
ed (
prob
lem
sol
ving
and
col
labo
ratio
n sk
ills,
stud
y sk
ills)
goa
ls a
ndob
ject
ives
whi
ch p
rom
ote
mea
ning
ful p
artic
ipat
ion
in a
ge-a
ppro
pria
te a
ctiv
ities
in h
ome,
recr
eatio
nal,
educ
atio
nal,
wor
k an
d ot
her
aspe
cts
of c
omm
unity
life
, set
a h
igh
stan
dard
of
exce
llenc
e an
dadd
ress
the
need
s of
all
stud
ents
.
19.
A v
arie
ty o
f ag
e-ap
prop
riat
e no
n-sc
hool
inst
ruct
iona
l set
tings
(e.
g., d
ayca
re s
ettin
gs,
the
stud
ent's
hom
e,lo
cal s
tore
s, a
nd jo
b si
tes)
are
ava
ilabl
e to
stu
dent
s an
d m
atch
ed to
indi
vidu
al n
eeds
for
lear
ning
new
skill
s or
for
gen
eral
izin
g sk
ills
to n
ew s
ettin
gs.
20.
The
pro
cess
for
iden
tifyi
ng c
urri
culu
m c
onte
nt f
or a
n in
divi
dual
stu
dent
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
inba
sic
skill
and
/or
soci
al a
reas
incl
udes
an
anal
ysis
of
the
stud
ent's
ski
lls a
nd in
tere
stc
and
of th
e ag
e-ap
prop
ri-
ate
activ
ities
, ski
lls a
nd a
dapt
atio
ns n
eede
d fo
r th
e st
uden
t to
func
tion
in s
peci
fic
hom
e, s
choo
l, w
ork,
recr
eatio
n an
d ot
her
com
mun
ity s
ettin
gs.
21.
Obj
ectiv
es f
or s
tude
nts
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in b
asic
ski
ll an
d/or
soc
ial a
reas
spe
cify
cri
teri
aw
hich
incl
ude
perf
orm
ance
in th
e st
uden
t's h
ome,
sch
ool a
nd o
ther
age
-app
ropr
iate
com
mun
ity s
ettin
gs.
22.
Stud
ents
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds
in b
asic
ski
ll an
d /o
r so
cial
are
as h
ave
paid
wor
k ex
peri
ence
s in
inte
grat
edco
mm
unity
set
tings
pri
or to
leav
ing
scho
ol.
23.
The
sys
tem
for
mon
itori
ng th
e pr
ogre
ss o
f st
uden
ts w
ith in
tens
ive
need
s in
bas
ic s
kill
and/
orso
cial
are
asin
clud
es: a
) in
dica
tions
of
leve
l of
inde
pend
ence
on
iden
tifie
d sk
ills/
activ
ities
; b)
indi
catio
ns o
f en
viro
n-m
ents
in w
hich
thos
e sk
ills/
activ
ities
hav
e be
en d
emon
stra
ted;
c)
an a
nnua
l sum
mar
y;an
d d)
pos
tsc
hool
fol
low
ups
for
pur
pose
s of
pro
gram
impr
ovem
ent.
Part
I
El El
El
El
El
El
Part
II
ED El El
El
El
El
El
El
Page
3
![Page 125: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
BE
ST P
RA
CT
ICE
CH
EC
KL
IST
FO
R I
ND
IVID
UA
L S
TU
DE
NT
S
DE
LIV
ER
Y O
F IN
STR
UC
TIO
NA
L S
UPP
OR
T S
ER
VIC
ES
24.
Inst
ruct
iona
l sup
port
ser
vice
s an
d st
aff
(e.g
., C
hapt
er 1
, spe
cial
edu
catio
n, s
peec
h an
d la
ngua
ge, g
uid-
ance
, pee
r tu
tori
ng)
are
inco
rpor
ated
into
ong
oing
sch
ool a
ndco
mm
unity
act
iviti
es.
25.
The
dec
isio
n to
pul
l any
stu
dent
out
of
ongo
ing
scho
ol o
r co
mm
unity
act
iviti
es to
rec
eive
sup
port
serv
ices
is a
team
dec
isio
n ba
sed
upon
doc
umen
tatio
n th
at th
e st
uden
t's n
eeds
cou
ld n
ot b
e ac
hiev
edth
roug
h th
e us
e of
sup
plem
enta
ry a
ids
and
serv
ices
in th
e cl
assr
oom
. Thi
s de
cisi
on is
not
bas
ed u
pon
staf
f pr
efer
ence
s.
26.
For
stud
ents
with
nee
ds (
e.g.
, cou
nsel
ing,
com
mun
ity-b
ased
trai
ning
, med
ical
) w
hich
can
not b
e m
etth
roug
h on
goin
g ac
tiviti
es, p
ull o
ut is
sch
edul
ed d
urin
g ac
tiviti
es w
hich
the
team
det
erm
ines
tobe
low
est p
rior
ity f
or th
e st
uden
t.
27.
The
del
iver
y of
inst
ruct
iona
l sup
port
ser
vice
s (e
.g.,
cons
ulta
tion,
trai
ning
, tec
hnic
al a
ssis
tanc
e, c
oope
ra-
tive
plan
ning
with
sup
port
sta
ff, t
eam
teac
hing
with
sup
port
sta
ff, s
uppo
rt s
taff
del
iver
ing
dire
ct s
ervi
ces
in th
e cl
assr
oom
, rel
ease
tim
e fo
r pl
anni
ng, a
cces
s to
inst
ruct
iona
l sup
port
team
s) in
clud
es s
uppo
rt to
teac
hers
, tea
chin
g as
sist
ants
, vol
unte
ers,
and
oth
er d
irec
t ins
truc
tiona
l sta
ff.
IND
IVID
UA
LIZ
ED
IN
STR
UC
TIO
N
28.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
all s
tude
nts
with
opp
ortu
nitie
s to
set
per
sona
l goa
ls a
nd to
pla
n, w
ith p
aren
ts a
ndte
ache
rs, h
ow th
eir
goal
s w
ill b
e ad
dres
sed
duri
ng th
e sc
hool
yea
r.
29.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
staf
f to
bec
ome
prof
icie
nt a
t pre
view
ing
inst
ruct
iona
l act
iviti
es,
givi
ng c
lear
wri
tten
and
verb
al d
irec
tions
, che
ckin
g fo
r st
uden
t und
erst
andi
ng a
nd g
ivin
g st
uden
tsco
nstr
uctiv
e fe
edba
ck a
nd p
ositi
ve r
einf
orce
men
t.
30.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
staf
f to
bec
ome
prof
icie
nt in
usi
ng a
var
iety
of
inst
ruct
iona
lm
etho
ds (
e.g.
, coo
pera
tive
lear
ning
, who
le la
ngua
ge, p
eer
tuto
ring
, dri
ll an
d pr
actic
e, in
cide
ntal
teac
h-in
g, c
ompu
ter-
assi
sted
inst
ruct
ion)
, mat
chin
g m
etho
ds to
indi
vidu
al s
tude
nt n
eeds
, and
inco
rpor
atin
gm
etho
ds in
to o
ngoi
ng a
ctiv
ities
.
3LA
var
iety
of
inst
ruct
iona
l gro
upin
gs (
e.g.
, sm
all g
roup
, lar
ge g
roup
, mul
ti-ag
ed g
roup
s, c
oope
rativ
egr
oup,
indi
vidu
al in
stru
ctio
n) is
ava
ilabl
e to
all
stud
ents
and
mat
ched
to in
divi
dual
stud
ent n
eeds
.
32.
A v
arie
ty o
f in
stru
ctor
s (e
.g.,
teac
hers
, tea
cher
ass
ista
nts,
sam
e-ag
e pe
er tu
tors
, cro
ss-a
ge p
eer
tuto
rs,
peer
men
tors
, vol
unte
ers)
are
ava
ilabl
e to
stu
dent
s an
d m
atch
ed to
indi
vidu
alst
uden
t nee
ds.
Page
414
4
Impo
rtan
tPr
actic
e N
atlit
edus
akal
yto
Stu
dent
'sIn
corp
orat
ed in
toPr
ogra
mSt
uden
t's P
rogr
amPa
rt I
ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci
Part
II
ci ci ci El ci ci a ci
145
![Page 126: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
141
BE
ST P
RA
CT
ICE
CH
EC
KL
IST
FO
R I
ND
IVID
UA
L S
TU
DE
NT
SIm
port
ant
to S
tude
nt's
Prog
ram
Prac
tice
riot
Ade
quat
ely
Inco
rpor
ated
into
Stud
ent's
Pro
gram
33.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
staf
f to
bec
ome
prof
icie
nt a
t usi
ng a
var
iety
of
inst
ruct
iona
lm
ater
ials
(e.
g., r
eal i
tem
s, p
hoto
grap
hs, d
raw
ings
, wor
k sh
eets
, tex
tboo
ks, a
udio
/vis
uals
), a
t mat
chin
gm
ater
ials
to in
divi
dual
stu
dent
nee
ds, a
nd in
corp
orat
ing
mat
eria
ls in
to o
ngoi
ng a
ctiv
ities
.
34.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
staf
f to
bec
ome
prof
icie
nt a
t tea
chin
g se
vera
l dif
fere
nt g
oals
from
the
sam
e cu
rric
ulum
are
a th
roug
h a
sing
le g
roup
act
ivity
(e.
g., d
urin
g a
grou
p m
ath
activ
ity s
ome
stud
ents
may
be
lear
ning
add
ition
whi
le o
ther
s ar
e le
arni
ng c
ount
ing
or o
ne-t
o-on
e co
rres
pond
ence
).
35.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
staf
f to
bec
ome
prof
icie
nt a
t tea
chin
g go
als
from
dif
fere
ntcu
rric
ulum
are
7- th
roug
h th
e sa
me
grou
p ac
tivity
(e.
g., d
urin
g a
grou
p so
cial
stu
dies
act
ivity
som
est
uden
ts m
ay h
ave
a pr
imar
y go
al o
f le
arni
ng th
e so
cial
stu
dies
con
tent
whi
le o
ther
s ha
ve p
rim
ary
goal
sof
lear
ning
lang
uage
, com
mun
icat
ion)
.
36.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
oppo
rtun
ities
for
all
staf
f an
d st
uden
ts to
bec
ome
prof
icie
nt a
t ide
ntif
ying
a v
arie
tyof
way
s st
uden
ts c
an a
cqui
re o
r de
mon
stra
te s
kills
/kno
wle
dge
(e.g
., si
gnin
g, w
ritin
g, ty
ping
, ges
turi
ng,
oral
test
s or
rep
orts
, art
dis
play
s, ta
ped
pres
enta
tions
), m
atch
ing
them
to in
divi
dual
stu
dent
nee
ds, a
ndin
corp
orat
ing
them
into
ong
oing
act
iviti
es.
317.
For
each
less
on c
urre
ntly
bei
ng ta
ught
, the
re is
a w
ritte
n in
stru
ctio
nal p
rogr
am o
r le
sson
pla
n w
hich
isav
aila
ble
to a
ll di
rect
inst
ruct
iona
l sta
ff.
38.
Stud
ent p
rogr
ess
is m
onito
red
and
anal
yzed
on
a re
gula
rly
sche
dule
d ba
sis.
39.
Dec
isio
ns to
mod
ify
inst
ruct
iona
l gro
upin
gs, m
etho
ds o
r m
ater
ials
are
bas
ed u
pon
mea
sure
s of
stu
dent
prog
ress
.
40.
A c
urre
nt s
ched
ule
of d
aily
stu
dent
act
iviti
es w
hich
des
crib
es w
hat i
s be
ing
done
, whe
n, a
nd w
ithw
hom
, is
avai
labl
e an
d re
adily
acc
essi
ble.
TR
AN
SIT
ION
PL
AN
NIN
G
41.
The
re a
re p
roce
dure
s fo
r fa
cilit
atin
g th
e sm
ooth
tran
sitio
n of
all
stud
ents
fro
m o
ne e
duca
tiona
l set
ting
toan
othe
r, a
nd f
rom
sch
ool t
o po
st-s
choo
l lif
e.
42.
A w
ritte
n pl
an f
or tr
ansi
tioni
ng e
ach
stud
ent w
ith in
tens
ive
need
s, in
clud
ing
stud
ents
who
are
gif
ted,
from
one
edu
catio
nal s
ettin
g to
ano
ther
is d
evel
oped
and
impl
emen
ted
in a
dvan
ce o
f th
e m
ove
(e.g
., 6
to9
mon
ths)
.
43.
For
high
sch
ool a
ged
stud
ents
with
inte
nsiv
e ne
eds,
a w
ritte
n gr
adua
tion
plan
for
tran
sitio
n to
pos
t-sc
hool
life
(e.
g., e
mpl
oym
ent,
educ
atio
n, r
ecre
atio
n, r
esid
entia
l) is
dev
elop
ed a
nd im
plem
ente
d w
ell i
nad
vanc
e of
the
tran
sitio
n (e
.g.,
at a
ge f
ourt
een)
and
rev
iew
ed a
nnua
lly.
Part
I
El El
El
El
Part
II
El
El
CI
El
CI
Page
5
![Page 127: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
BE
ST P
RA
CT
ICE
CH
EC
KL
IST
FO
R I
ND
IVID
UA
L S
TU
DE
NT
S
FAM
ILY
-SC
HO
OL
CO
LL
AB
OR
AT
ION
44.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
fam
ilies
with
the
free
dom
to v
isit
the
scho
ol a
nd to
com
mun
icat
e re
gula
rly
with
scho
ol s
taff
on
topi
cs im
port
ant t
o bo
th th
e fa
mily
and
the
scho
ol.
45.
The
re is
info
rmat
ion
avai
labl
e to
fam
ilies
whi
ch a
ssis
ts th
em to
acc
ess
info
rmal
sup
port
netw
orks
and
conn
ect w
ith c
omm
unity
res
ourc
es (
e.g.
, day
care
pro
gram
s,re
crea
tion
prog
ram
s, c
ouns
elin
g, r
espi
teca
re, v
ocat
iona
l reh
abili
tatio
n, m
enta
l hea
lth).
46.
The
sch
ool p
rovi
des
fam
ilies
with
opp
ortu
nitie
s fo
r co
nsul
tatio
n, tr
aini
ngan
d fo
llow
-up
from
sch
ool
staf
f to
max
imiz
e th
eir
child
ren'
s de
velo
pmen
t in
hom
e an
d ot
her
com
mun
ityse
tting
s.
47.
Fam
ilies
are
incl
uded
in a
dvis
ory,
dec
isio
n-m
akin
g, a
nd a
dvoc
acy
activ
ities
of
the
scho
ol (
e.g.
, adv
isor
yco
mm
ittee
s, c
urri
culu
m c
omm
ittee
s, d
evel
opm
ent o
f th
e sc
hool
phi
loso
phy
and
clim
ate,
sch
ool p
lann
ing
team
s, s
taff
dev
elop
men
t com
mitt
ees)
.
48.
Fam
ilies
are
incl
uded
in th
e de
cisi
on-m
akin
g pr
oces
s to
det
erm
ine
the
high
prio
rity
edu
catio
nal n
eeds
of
thei
r ch
ildre
n, a
nd h
ow a
nd w
here
(sc
hool
, hom
e, o
r co
mm
unity
set
tings
)the
ir c
hild
ren
will
be
taug
ht.
49.
Inst
ruct
iona
l pla
nnin
g in
clud
es p
roce
dure
s fo
r as
sist
ing
fam
ilies
to in
corp
orat
e in
stru
ctio
nan
d/cr
prac
tice
of s
kills
into
ong
oing
hom
e an
d co
mm
unity
act
iviti
es.
PLA
NN
ING
FO
R C
ON
TIN
UE
D B
EST
PR
AC
TIC
E I
MPR
OV
EM
EN
T
50.
A p
lan
for
impr
ovin
g be
st p
ract
ice-
base
d se
rvic
es w
ithin
the
scho
ol is
deve
lope
d ev
ery
thre
e to
fiv
eye
ars
by a
sch
ool p
lann
ing
team
con
sist
ing
of a
dmin
istr
ator
s,st
aff,
stu
dent
s, p
aren
ts, s
choo
l boa
rdm
embe
rs a
nd o
ther
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs.
51.
The
sch
ool's
pla
n in
clud
es: a
) a
revi
ew o
f th
e sc
hool
's g
oals
and
the
exte
nt to
whi
chgo
als
and
best
educ
atio
nal p
ract
ices
are
ach
ieve
d; b
) an
exa
min
atio
n of
ser
vice
s of
fere
d by
the
scho
olan
d ho
w th
eyre
late
to s
tude
nt, f
amily
, and
com
mun
ity n
eeds
; c)
follo
w-u
p m
easu
res
of s
tude
nts'
perf
orm
ance
in th
ene
xt s
choo
l set
ting
or p
ost s
choo
l set
tings
; and
d)
activ
ities
and
timel
ines
for
impr
ovin
g be
st p
ract
ices
.
52.
The
sch
ool p
lann
ing
team
mee
ts p
erio
dica
lly to
mon
itor
prog
ress
on
impl
emen
ting
thes
choo
l's p
lan
and
to m
ake
nece
ssar
y ad
just
men
ts in
act
iviti
es a
nd ti
mel
ines
for
achi
evin
g th
e pl
an.
53.
The
sch
ool's
pla
n an
d su
bseq
uent
rep
orts
of
prog
ress
in im
plem
entin
g th
e pl
an a
redi
ssem
inat
ed to
pare
nts,
sch
ool d
istr
ict s
taff
and
com
mun
ity m
embe
rs.
54.
The
re is
a p
erio
dic
eval
uatio
n of
the
plan
ning
pro
cess
by
scho
ol s
taff
, stu
dent
s, p
aren
ts,c
omm
unity
mem
bers
and
per
sons
fro
m o
utsi
de o
f th
e sc
hool
(e.
g., s
taff
fro
m o
ther
sch
ools
, col
lege
s an
dun
iver
sitie
s,
stat
e an
d lo
cal g
over
nmen
t).
Page
614
8
Impo
rtan
tto
Stu
dent
'sPr
ogra
m
k.
Prac
tice
Not
Ade
quat
ely
Inco
rpor
ated
into
Stud
ent's
Pro
gram
Part
I
EJ El
El
El
El
El
El
El
El
El
El
Part
II
El
El
El
El 14
9
![Page 128: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
BE
ST F
RA
CH
CE
CH
EC
KL
IST
FO
R I
ND
IVID
UA
L S
TU
DE
NT
S
rPart
IPa
rt I
I
r Pa
rt I
IIIt
em N
umbe
rR
ecom
men
datio
ns f
or m
akin
g ite
m a
vaila
ble
Page
7
![Page 129: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
III Emir IIIlull iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiilUll mumummuninmsEmu uuuuuuiuuuuuuiNum samalummimmus.lull 11111111111111111111111111111111111
MEM 11111111111111111111111111111111111111lull 1111111111111111111111111111111111111
MIMI 111111111111111111111111111111111111111lull 1111111111111111111111111111111111111mom Immummuummunumliii 111111111111111111111111141111lUll 111111111111111111111 IUUIIIIll 1111111111111111111111111111111111111nom imummuniummmum11111111 11111111111111111111111111 EM=lUll 11111111111111111111111 1111111111111MI MOM 11111111111111111Ern 1111111111111011111111111111111111111111lull 1111111111111111111MMIMMUMMIlull mmitmoNIIIIImmum
1111111111111111111111111111111111111Ill IIMMEMMIIuuuuuuiuuuu IMI1111111111111111111111111111 Ill11M1111111111M11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111Imuununommmumm1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111=
![Page 130: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
FACTivity Selection Worksheet
Student
.1
Date
Aetivity/Class
Curriculum Adaptations:
The student will learn all of the general education content. 0
The student will learn a sub-set of the content. 0
The student will learn different content from the same content area. 0
The student will not learn the general education content. 0
Other adaptations (list):
Specific Skills from Priority Skill Areas to be Addressed
Accommodations
![Page 131: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
Teacher
Student
(CClass/Activity Summary Form
Activity/Class
Year 1st 0 2nd 0 3rd 0 4th 0 Quarter
Student's General Education OutcomesItems Addressed Each Week( V )
Week I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Priority Skill Area Items Addressed Each Week( V )
Priority Skill Area Items Addressed Each Week( V )
155
![Page 132: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
Class/Activity Summary Form page 2
Items Addressed Each Week( V )
Priority Skill Area Week 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Priority Skill Area Items Addressed Each Week( V )
Priority Skill Area Items Addressed Each Week( V )
Priority Skill Area Items Addressed Each Week( V )
Accommodations -
156
![Page 133: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
ACTIVITY COMPATIBILITY PLAN
Student Class TeacherDoes the Activity have
Description of Class Activities (e.g., lecture, drill) Instructional Value?1. 1. Yes No
2. 2. Yes No
3. 3. Yes No
4. 4. Yes No
5. 5. Yes No
6. 6. Yes No
OUTCOMES FOR GROSTUDENT CAN
BENEFIT
OUTCOMES FOR STUDENTOTHER STUDENTSUSE/PRACTICEDURING CLASS
ARRANGEMENT
Large GroupSmall Group - Teacher DirectedSmall Group - Student DirectedCooperative Group
CURRENTLYUSED IN THEGROUP
STUDENTCAN CHANGESWORK IN NEEDED
Independent1:1 in a Small Group ContextOther:
Comments
IS?
![Page 134: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
TEACHING METHODS
Verbal Directions
CURRENTLYUSED IN THEGROUP
STUDENT CANBENEFIT FROM
CHANGESNEEDED
LectureQuestioningDiscussionTeacher Demonstration / ModelCoachingDrill and PracticeComputer AidedShapingFadingTime delayOther
Comments
MATERIALSCURRENTLYUSED IN THE STUDENT CAN CHANGESGROUP BENEFIT FROM NEEDED
Real ItemsPhotographsMiniature ObjectsLine DrawingsWork Books / Work SheetsTextbooksAudio / VisualConcrete Experienceaper an Pencil
Test FormsOther
Comments -1
158
![Page 135: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
STUDENT RESPONSE
Look At
CURRENTLYUSED IN GROUP
STUDENTCAN USE
CHANGESNEEDED
TouchPick UpPoint AtMark ChoiceDraw Line to ConnectUnderlineColorWrite Short AnswersWrite Long ExercisesWrite Numerals, Math ProblemsLabel ItemsReply "Yes/No" or "Don't Know"Simple Words or PhrasesSay Short AnswersRead AloudExpress Thoughts and Feelings .Make Formal PresentationsOther
Comments
15
![Page 136: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
Brainstormed Options
StudentClass Teacher Date
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
1GO
![Page 137: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
Adaptations/Changes
StudentClass Teacher Date_
1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Evaluation QuestionsWill the adaptations/changes:Draw negative attention to the student? Make the student stand out? Be too intrusive?Provide sufficient opportunities for the student to practice/learn her objectives for the activity?Be practical? Provide sufficient opportunities for the student to participate in the activity withfellow students?Will fellow students be involved in implementing the adaptations/changes?
161
![Page 138: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
Support Task Planning Sheet )Student Date
TaskPerson(s)Responsible
DateInitiated
DateCompleted
-NOM.
162
![Page 139: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
Priority Skill Areas - Program Summary
Student Name
Date Initiated
Selected Skill Areas and Skills
First Quarter SvImmary-Second Quarter Summa
Third Quarter SummaryEnd of Year Summary
163
I
COMMENTSSumniazy Key:
A = AccomplishedP = Making ProgressC = Little Progress. but
will Continue ProgramD = Dmpped -
![Page 140: DOCUMENT RESUME ED 361 977 EC 302 448 · Michaella Collins, Suzanne Paquette and Jane Ross-Allen. Authorship. Authors are listed alphabetically. Authorship of this manual was a joint](https://reader036.fdocuments.in/reader036/viewer/2022071018/5fd1eeee5bc5ba58e309e676/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
C.ACTIVITY/CLASS MANAGEMENT PLAN
Activity/Class
Number of Students Location of Activity
Instructor
Additional Adults are Required During the ActivirClass to:
Provide instruction to the student 0Provide instruction to other students 0Manage the student's physical needs 0Implement behavior management strategies 0Implement social integration strategies 0Provide assistance during transitions 0Train and monitor peer tutor/buddies 0On ler
If a teaching assistant or volunteer is available, who is responsible for the dailysupervision?
Who is responsf5lc: for designing the student's instructional programs?
Who is responsible for interfacing the student's program with ongoingactivities?
How often will instructional data be collected?
Who is responsible for providing training and follow-up to direct instructional staff?
How often will training/follow-up occur?
When will training/follow-up occur?
If individualized instmctional materials are necessary, who will develop the student'smaterials?
Comments:
164